# embedding_metadata

key: chroma:document
string_value:
- Relation to other functions
In other functions such as canned cycle, the manual intervention and return function is effective.
- PMC axis control
If intervention is performed under PMC axis control after feed-holding of automatic operation, return 
operation does not apply to the axis moving under PMC axis control when the return operation starts.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64694EN/01 OPERATION 4. AUTOMATIC OPERATION
- 837 -
If the return operation is started with the axis under PMC axis control being stopped after having 
completed the PMC axis control command, however, the return operation is performed by the amount of
movement by PMC axis control.
When PMC axis control is used for an axis unrelated to the program command, set bit 0 (NRT) of 
parameter No. 10410 to 1 to exclude the axis completely from return operation by the manual


key: chroma:document
string_value:
intervention and return function.
Limitations
- Enabling/disabling of manual intervention and return function
Manual intervention and return function is enabled in the feed hold state.
Manual intervention and return function is disabled in automatic operation stop state (single block stop, 
feed hold stop with no travel distance remaining, etc.) and the operation is performed according to the 
manual absolute on/off function.
- Offset


key: chroma:document
string_value:
- Offset
When the tool is replaced using manual intervention for a reason such as tool damage, even if the amount 
of offset is changed when restarting in the middle of the interrupted block, the change is not reflected in 
machining.
- Machine lock, mirror image, and scaling
When performing manual intervention and return, never use the machine lock, mirror image, or scaling 
function.
- 3-dimensional coordinate system conversion, and tilted working plane 
indexing


key: chroma:document
string_value:
indexing
Alarm PS5219, “CAN NOT RETURN” is issued when manual intervention and the return is attempted 
during execution of 3-dimensional coordinate system conversion, or tilted working plane indexing.
- Parking
Do not switch the parking signal during manual intervention and return (for example, after feed hold stop). 
The tool may not return in the right position when the parking signal is switched during manual 
intervention and return.
- Manual intervention and return by multi-path system


key: chroma:document
string_value:
If cycle start is executed at the same time on two or more paths in a multi-path system, the path that 
performed manual intervention does return operation. However, the path that did not perform manual 
intervention restarts processing without doing return operation.
- Axis for which return operation is not performed
When the axis is in the following conditions, return operation of the axis is not performed.
- Spindle positioning
- Tapping
- Slave axis of axis synchronous control


key: chroma:document
string_value:
- Slave axis of synchronous control
- Spindle control by servo motor
- Polygon axis
NOTE
Under synchronous control, manual intervention and return can be performed for 
the slave axis only when bit 2 (PKUx) of parameter No. 8162 is 1 and the master 
axis is parking.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
4. AUTOMATIC OPERATION OPERATION B-64694EN/01
- 838 -
- Feed hold during return operation
Feed hold is not effective during return operation.
4.13 RETRACE
M
Overview
The tool can retrace the path along which the tool has moved so far (reverse execution). Furthermore, 
the tool can move along the retraced path in the forward direction (forward reexecution). After forward 
reexecution is performed until the tool reaches the position at which reverse execution started,


key: chroma:document
string_value:
machining is continued as programmed.
Procedure
- Forward execution → reverse execution
To perform forward execution of a program, set the “REVERSE” switch on the machine operator’s panel 
to off, then perform a cycle start operation. If the “REVERSE” switch on the machine operator’s panel is 
set to on, reverse execution or the end of reverse execution results.
To perform reverse execution of a program, use one of the following three methods:


key: chroma:document
string_value:
(1) Set the “REVERSE” switch on the machine operator’s panel to on during forward execution of a 
block.
(2) Perform a single block stop operation during forward execution, then set the “REVERSE” switch on 
the machine operator’s panel to on.
(3) Perform a feed hold stop operation during forward execution, then set the “REVERSE” switch on 
the machine operator’s panel to on.
When method (1) is used, reverse execution starts after the end of the block being executed (after


key: chroma:document
string_value:
execution up to the single block stop position). Reverse execution does not start as soon as the 
“REVERSE” switch on the machine operator’s panel is set to on.
Forward
Reverse
"REVERSE" switch = ON
Cycle start (start of forward execution)
Start of reverse execution
Fig. 4.13 (a)
When method (2) is used, performing a cycle start operation starts reverse execution from the position at 
which a single block stop takes place.
Single block stop
"REVERSE" switch = ON
Cycle start


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Cycle start
Cycle start (start of forward execution)
Start of reverse execution
Forward
Reverse
Fig. 4.13 (b)


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64694EN/01 OPERATION 4. AUTOMATIC OPERATION
- 839 -
When method (3) is used, performing a cycle start operation starts reverse execution from the position at 
which a feed hold stop takes place.
Feed hold stop
"REVERSE" switch = ON
Cycle start
Cycle start (start of forward execution)
Start of reverse execution
Forward
Reverse
Fig. 4.13 (c)
- Reverse execution → forward reexecution
To perform forward reexecution of a program, use one of the following three methods:


key: chroma:document
string_value:
(1) Set the “REVERSE” switch on the machine operator’s panel to off during reverse execution of 
a block.
(2) Set the “REVERSE” switch on the machine operator’s panel to off after a single block stop 
takes place during reverse execution.
(3) Set the “REVERSE” switch on the machine operator’s panel to off after a feed hold stop takes 
place during reverse execution.
When method (1) is used, forward reexecution starts after the block being executed ends (after execution


key: chroma:document
string_value:
up to the position at which a single block stop takes place). Forward reexecution does not start as soon as 
the “REVERSE” switch on the machine operator’s panel is set to off.
Cycle start (start of forward execution)
Start of forward "REVERSE" switch = OFF
reexecution
Forward
Reverse
Forward 
reexecution
Start of reverse execution
Fig. 4.13 (d)
When method (2) is used, performing a cycle start operation starts forward reexecution from the position 
at which a single block stop takes place.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Cycle start (start of forward execution)
Start of forward reexecution
Forward
Reverse
Forward 
reexecution
Start of reverse execution
Restart of forward execution
Fig. 4.13 (e)


key: chroma:document
string_value:
4. AUTOMATIC OPERATION OPERATION B-64694EN/01
- 840 -
When method (3) is used, performing a cycle start operation starts forward reexecution from the position 
at which a feed hold stop takes place.
Feed hold stop
"REVERSE" switch = OFF
Cycle start
Cycle start (start of forward execution)
Start of forward reexecution
Forward
Reverse
Forward 
reexecution
Start of reverse execution
Fig. 4.13 (f)
- Reverse execution → end of reverse execution → forward reexecution


key: chroma:document
string_value:
When a block to be executed is no longer present during reverse execution (when reverse execution has 
been performed up to the block where forward execution started, or when forward execution has not yet 
been performed), the reverse execution end state is entered, and operation stops.
Even when a cycle start operation is performed while the “REVERSE” switch on the machine operator’s 
panel is held on, operation is not performed, and the reverse execution end state is maintained. Forward


key: chroma:document
string_value:
reexecution (or forward execution) is started by setting the “REVERSE” switch on the machine 
operator’s panel to off then performing a cycle start operation.
End of reverse execution
"REVERSE" switch = 
OFF
Cycle start
Cycle start (start of forward execution)
Start of forward reexecution
Forward
Reverse
Forward 
reexecution
Start of reverse execution
Fig. 4.13 (g)
- Forward reexecution → forward execution


key: chroma:document
string_value:
After forward reexecution is performed up to the block at which reverse execution started, forward 
execution starts automatically, and commands are read from the program again and executed. No 
particular operation is required.
Cycle start (start of forward execution)
Start of forward reexecution
Forward
Reverse
Forward 
reexecution
Start of reverse execution
Restart of forward execution
Fig. 4.13 (h)


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Fig. 4.13 (h)
If reverse execution was performed after feed hold stop, forward reexecution ends when the feed hold 
stop position is reached, then forward execution is performed. Also if single block operation was 
performed, forward reexecution ends at the single block stop position.
Cycle start (start of forward execution)
Start of forward reexecution
Forward
Reverse
Forward 
reexecution
Feed hold stop
"REVERSE" switch = OFF, cycle start
Start of reverse execution


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64694EN/01 OPERATION 4. AUTOMATIC OPERATION
- 841 -
Explanation
- Reverse execution and forward execution
Usually in automatic operation, a program is executed in the programmed order. This is called forward 
execution. This function allows a program executed by forward execution to be executed in the reverse 
direction. This is called reverse execution. Reverse execution allows the tool to retrace the path along 
which the tool has moved during forward execution.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Reverse execution of a program can be performed only for blocks that have been executed by forward 
execution.
Furthermore, in single block operation, reverse execution can also be performed on a block-by-block 
basis .
- Forward reexecution
Blocks that have been executed by reverse execution can be reexecuted in the forward direction up to the 
block from which reverse execution started. This is called forward reexecution. Forward reexecution


key: chroma:document
string_value:
allows the tool to retrace the same tool path as in forward execution until the position at which reverse 
execution started is reached.
After the block from which reverse execution started is reached, the program is executed again in the 
programmed order (forward execution).
Furthermore, in single block operation, forward reexecution can also be performed on a block-by-block 
basis.
- End of reverse execution


key: chroma:document
string_value:
- End of reverse execution
When a block to be executed is no longer present during reverse execution (when stored blocks have all 
been executed during reverse execution, or when forward execution has not yet been performed), 
operation stops. This is called the end of reverse execution.
- Status indication
During reverse execution, characters "RVRS" blink on the screen. During forward reexecution, characters


key: chroma:document
string_value:
"RTRY" blink to indicate that forward reexecution is in progress. The "RTRY" indication is kept blinking 
until the block at which reverse execution started is reached and normal operation starts (until forward 
execution is restarted).
When a block to be executed is no longer present during reverse execution, or if an attempt is made to 
perform reverse execution for a block that cannot be executed by reverse execution, characters "RVED"


key: chroma:document
string_value:
blink, notifying the user that reverse execution can no longer be performed.
- Number of blocks that can be executed by reverse execution
Up to about 100 blocks can be executed by reverse execution. Depending on the specified program, the 
maximum number of executable blocks may decrease.
- Reset
A reset operation (the RESET key on the MDI unit, the external reset signal, or the reset & rewind signal) 
clears the blocks stored for reverse execution.
- Feedrate


key: chroma:document
string_value:
- Feedrate
A feedrate to be applied during reverse execution can be specified in parameter No. 1414. If this 
parameter is set to 0, the feedrate in reverse execution is assumed to be the same as that in forward 
execution. Rapid traverse, however, is performed always at the rapid traverse rate, regardless of the 
setting of this parameter.
The feedrate in forward reexecution is always the same as that in forward execution.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
In reverse execution or forward reexecution, feedrate override, rapid traverse override, and dry run are 
allowed.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
4. AUTOMATIC OPERATION OPERATION B-64694EN/01
- 842 -
- Start of reverse execution or forward reexecution after the end of a block
In a block for rapid traverse (G00), linear interpolation (G01), circular interpolation (G02, G03), dwelling 
(G04), skip cutting (G31), or an auxiliary function in an automatic operation mode (memory operation, 
part program operation, or MDI operation), reverse execution or forward reexecution can be started.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
However, reverse execution and forward reexecution do not start as soon as the reverse execution signal 
status is changed. When the block has ended, that is, after a movement, dwelling, or an auxiliary function 
is completed, reverse execution or forward reexecution starts.
- Start of reverse execution or forward reexecution after feed hold stop
When a feed hold stop operation is performed during execution of rapid traverse (G00), linear


key: chroma:document
string_value:
interpolation (G01), circular interpolation (G02, G03), or skip cutting (G31), then the reverse execution 
signal status is changed and operation is restarted, reverse execution or forward reexecution can be started
immediately from the stop position. This cannot be performed when dwelling (G04) or an auxiliary 
function is being executed.
Start of 
reverse 
execution
Feed hold stop
"REVERSE" switch = ON
Cycle start
Feed hold stop
"REVERSE" switch = OFF
Cycle start


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Cycle start
End of reverse execution, start of forward reexecution
Fig. 4.13 (j)
When reverse execution is started after feed hold stop operation, the part from the start point of that block 
to the feed hold stop position is stored as one block. Therefore, when forward reexecution is performed 
with the single block switch set to 1, a single block stop takes place as soon as the position at which 
reverse execution started is reached.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
- Start of reverse execution or forward reexecution after single block stop
After a single block stop takes place, reverse execution or forward reexecution can be started immediately 
when the reverse execution signal status is changed and restart operation is performed.
Limitation
- Blocks that cannot be executed by reverse execution
In the modes listed below, reverse execution cannot be performed.
When one of these commands appears during reverse execution, reverse execution ends immediately and


key: chroma:document
string_value:
"RVED" is displayed.
- Polar coordinate interpolation (G12.1, G13.1,G112,G113)
- Polar coordinate command (G16)
- Functions related thread cutting (G33,G34,G35,G36)
- Polygon turning (G50.2, G51.2)
- Tool axis direction control (G53.1)
- Single direction positioning (G60)
- Tapping mode (G63)
- Tapping cycle (G84,G74)
- Rigid tapping cycle (G84,G74,G84.2,G84.3)
- Fine boring cycle (G76)
- Back boring cycle (G87)


key: chroma:document
string_value:
- Back boring cycle (G87)
It is impossible to perform reverse execution for blocks specifying the commands listed below. If one of 
these commands appears during reverse execution, reverse execution ends immediately and "RVED" is 
displayed.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64694EN/01 OPERATION 4. AUTOMATIC OPERATION
- 843 -
Some of these commands turn a mode on and off. It is possible to start reverse execution and perform 
forward reexecution in a mode set by such a command. However, if a block that turns the mode on or off 
is reached during reverse execution, the reverse execution ends at that block, and "RVED" is displayed.
- Functions related AI contour control (G05,G05.1,G08)
- HRV3 on/off (G05.4)
- Inch/metric conversion (G20, G21)


key: chroma:document
string_value:
- Stored stroke check on/off (G22, G23)
- Functions related reference position return (G27, G28, G29, G30)
- 3-dimensional coordinate system conversion (G68, G69) 
- Feature coordinate system (G68.2) 
- Figure copying (G72.1,G72.2)
- Index table indexing
- Cs contouring control
- Spindle positioning
- Manual intervention
To execute a program in the reverse direction after a feed hold stop or single block stop, when manual


key: chroma:document
string_value:
intervention is performed after the stop, make a return to the original position and then turn on the reverse 
signal. Movement by manual intervention is ignored during reverse execution and forward reexecution.
If manual intervention is performed during reverse execution or forward reexecution, the amount of 
manual intervention is added to the coordinate system at a restart after a stop due to a feed hold or single


key: chroma:document
string_value:
block during forward execution after the end of forward reexecution. Whether to add the amount of 
manual intervention follows the manual absolute switch.
- Single block stop position
A block that is internally generated by the control unit is also treated as one block during reverse 
execution.
Path after compensation
Programmed path
<2>
2
3 4
5
1
<1>
Fig. 4.13 (k) Path when cutter compensation is applied


key: chroma:document
string_value:
In the above example, the program specifies two blocks, but in actual operation, move commands for five 
blocks are generated.
In such a case, positions at which a single block stop takes place may differ between forward execution 
and reverse execution.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
4. AUTOMATIC OPERATION OPERATION B-64694EN/01
- 844 -
- Positioning (G00) 
When non-linear type positioning is performed (bit 1 (LRP) of parameter No. 1401 is set to 0), the tool 
path in reverse execution and that in forward execution do not match. The tool path in forward 
reexecution is the same as that in forward execution.
When linear type positioning is performed (bit 1 (LRP) of parameter No. 1401 is set to 1), the tool path in 
reverse execution is the same as that in forward execution.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Forward
Reverse
Forward reexecution
Non-linear type positioning
(LRP = 0)
Linear type positioning
(LRP = 1)
X
Y
Fig. 4.13 (l)
- Dwell command (G04) 
During reverse execution or forward reexecution, the dwell command (G04) is executed in the same way 
as in normal operation.
- Programmable data input (G10) 
Tool compensation values, parameters, pitch error data, workpiece origin offsets, and tool life


key: chroma:document
string_value:
management values set or modified by programmable data input (G10) are ignored during reverse 
execution and forward reexecution.
- Skip function (G31) and automatic tool length measurement (G37) 
The skip signal and the measurement position arrival signal are ignored during reverse execution and 
forward reexecution. During reverse execution and forward reexecution, the tool moves along the path 
that the tool has actually passed during forward execution.
Forward Reverse 
reexecution execution


key: chroma:document
string_value:
reexecution execution
Forward execution
(Actual path)
Skip signal ON (G31)
or measurement position arrival signal ON (G37)
Signal not applied (G31)
(Programmed path)
Fig. 4.13 (m)
- Setup of a coordinate system (G92, G54 to G59, G54.1P_, G52, and G92.1)
As for the display of the absolute coordinate value under backward movement, the value in the work 
coordinate system when backward movement begins is displayed. Therefore, when the command (G92,


key: chroma:document
string_value:
G54 to G59, G54.1P_, and G52) to which the work coordinate system is changed is passed, a different 
value might be displayed as forward movement. However, the actual machine position does not differ.
- Mirror image
When a block to which a mirror image is applied by programmable mirror image (G50.1, G51.1) is 
executed during reverse execution, the tool moves along the actual path resulting from the application of a 
mirror image in the reverse direction.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
When a mirror image is applied to a block by setting or a machine signal, the block with the mirror image 
not applied is stored. Mirror image application by setting or a machine signal is enabled also during 
reverse execution and forward reexecution. Therefore, during reverse execution and forward reexecution, 
the mirror image by setting data or machine signal must be turned on and off so that this on/off status and 
the on/off status during forward execution match.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64694EN/01 OPERATION 4. AUTOMATIC OPERATION
- 845 -
- Changing offsets
Even when cutter compensation data or tool length offsets are changed during reverse execution or 
forward reexecution, the change in compensation or offset data does not become valid until forward 
reexecution ends and normal operation starts. Until then, the tool moves with the offset data that was 
applied when the block was executed for the first time during forward execution.
- Feedrate clamp


key: chroma:document
string_value:
- Feedrate clamp
During reverse execution or forward reexecution, feedrate clamp is not performed with parameter No. 
1420 (rapid traverse rate) or parameters Nos. 1430 and 1432 (maximum cutting feedrate). It is executed 
with parameter No. 1414 or at the feedrate assumed during forward execution.
If, for example, the parameters above are set to smaller values during reverse execution or forward 
reexecution, clamp is not performed with these values, but with parameter No. 1414 or at the feedrate


key: chroma:document
string_value:
assumed during forward execution.
For clamp at the feedrate assumed during backward execution or forward reexecution, change the feedrate 
with the external deceleration or override signal.
- Interrupt type custom macro
Do not initiate any interrupt during reverse execution.
Do not execute an interrupted block and the interrupt program in reverse execution.
- Tool management function
The tool life is not counted during reverse execution and forward reexecution.
- Inverse time feed (G93)


key: chroma:document
string_value:
- Inverse time feed (G93)
If a nonzero value is set as the feedrate to be applied during reverse execution in parameter No. 1414, a 
block that moves the tool by inverse time feed during forward execution is executed at the parameter-set
feedrate (feed per minute) during reverse execution.
If the feedrate during reverse execution (parameter No. 1414) is not set (= 0), the same feedrate as applied 
during forward execution is used.
- Maximum spindle speed clamp (G92Sxxxx)


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Clamping at a maximum spindle speed specified during reverse execution becomes valid. This means that 
if G92Sxxxx appears during reverse execution, the spindle speed is clamped at Sxxxx in the subsequent 
reverse execution. As a result, the clamp speed may differ between reverse execution and forward 
execution even when the same block is executed. The spindle speed is clamped when the G96 mode is set.
- Auxiliary functions


key: chroma:document
string_value:
- Auxiliary functions
M, S, T, and the second auxiliary function (B function) are output directly also during reverse execution 
and forward reexecution.
When specified together with a move command in the same block, M, S, T, and the second auxiliary 
function (B function) are output with the move command at the same time during forward execution, 
reverse execution, and forward reexecution. Therefore, the output positions of M, S, T, and the second


key: chroma:document
string_value:
auxiliary function (B function) during reverse execution differ from those during forward execution and 
forward reexecution.
- Custom macro
Custom macro operations are ignored during reverse execution and forward reexecution.
- Execution macro (macro executor)
Macro executor operations are ignored during reverse execution and forward reexecution.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
4. AUTOMATIC OPERATION OPERATION B-64694EN/01
- 846 -
- Tool retract and recover function
For retract operation and repositioning operation by the tool retract and recover function, reverse 
execution cannot be performed. Retract operation and repositioning operation are ignored during reverse 
execution and forward reexecution.
- AI contour control
When the reverse execution is started in AI contour control mode, a reverse execution ends immediately


key: chroma:document
string_value:
depending on a program then the backward movement is not possible.
During reverse execution and forward reexecution, the feedrate clamp function by acceleration under AI 
contour control is disabled.
- Display
During reverse execution and forward reexecution, the modal display and the display of the currently 
executed program are not updated; information obtained at the start of reverse execution is maintained.
Warning
WARNING


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Warning
WARNING
1 Auxiliary functions are output directly even during reverse execution and forward 
reexecution. Accordingly, the execution status of an auxiliary function during 
forward execution may be reversed during reverse execution.
Example:
When forward rotation of the spindle (M03) and stop (M05) are specified
When N3 is executed during reverse execution, M05 is output. So, when N2 
and N1 are executed during reverse execution, operation is performed with 
the spindle stopped.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
the spindle stopped.
When N1 is executed during forward reexecution, M03 is output. So, when 
N1 and N2 are executed during forward reexecution, operation is performed 
with the spindle rotating in the forward direction.
M03 (forward spindle 
rotation)
Forward spindle rotation
Forward
Reverse
Forward 
reexecution
Start of reverse execution
Restart of forward 
execution
M05 (spindle stopped)
Spindle stopped
N1
N2
N3


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Spindle stopped
N1
N2
N3
2 To perform reverse execution after a feed hold stop or single block stop 
operation, be sure to restore the original position if manual intervention has been 
performed after the stop , then set the "REVERSE" switch to on. Movements 
made by manual intervention are ignored during reverse execution and forward 
reexecution. (The same operation as in the manual absolute off state takes 
place.)
If manual intervention is performed during reverse execution or forward


key: chroma:document
string_value:
reexecution, the amount of manual intervention is added to the coordinate system 
at a restart after a stop due to a feed hold or single block during forward execution 
after the end of forward reexecution. Whether to add the amount of manual 
intervention follows the manual absolute switch.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64694EN/01 OPERATION 4. AUTOMATIC OPERATION
- 847 -
4.14 RETRACTION FOR RIGID TAPPING / RETRACTION FOR 
3-DIMENSIONAL RIGID TAPPING
Overview
When rigid tapping is stopped, either as a result of a power off, an emergency stop or a reset, the tap may 
cut into the workpiece. The tap can subsequently be drawn out by using a PMC signal or program 
command.
This function automatically stores information relating to the tapping executed most recently. When a tap


key: chroma:document
string_value:
retraction signal is input or G30 is executed, the tap is removed from the hole, based on the stored 
information. The tap is pulled toward the R point. When a retract value is set in parameter No. 5382, the 
retraction distance can be increased by the value.
In the retraction for 3-dimensional rigid tapping, 3-dimensional rigid tapping or the rigid tapping in tilted 
working plane indexing mode is stopped, the tap may cut into the workpiece. The tap can subsequently be 
drawn out.
Format


key: chroma:document
string_value:
drawn out.
Format
Retraction for rigid tapping
G30 P99 M29 S_；
P99 : P99 is required to indicate that the G30 is retraction for rigid tapping.
M29 : When the rigid tapping mode specification M code is set in parameter No.5210, 
specify that value instead of M29. This directive is optional.
S_ : Spindle speed. Because of S code when rigid tapping is interrupted is used, S 
code is optional.
Retraction for rigid tapping during 3-dimensional coordinate system 
conversion mode


key: chroma:document
string_value:
conversion mode
G68 X_ Y_ Z_ I_ J_ K_ R_ ; 3-dimensional coordinate system conversion (Note)
G30 P99 M29 S_；Retraction for rigid tapping
P99 : P99 is required to indicate that the G30 is retraction for rigid tapping.
M29 : When the rigid tapping mode specification M code is set in parameter No.5210, 
specify that value instead of M29. This directive is optional.
S_ : Spindle speed. Because of S code when rigid tapping is interrupted is used, S 
code is optional.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
code is optional.
Retraction for rigid tapping during tilted working plane command mode
G68.2 X_ Y_ Z_ I_ J_ K_ R_ ; Tilted working plane command (Note)
G53.1 ; Tool axis direction control
G30 P99 M29 S_；Retraction for rigid tapping
P99 : P99 is required to indicate that the G30 is retraction for rigid tapping.
M29 : When the rigid tapping mode specification M code is set in parameter No.5210, 
specify that value instead of M29. This directive is optional.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
S_ : Spindle speed. Because of S code when rigid tapping is interrupted is used, S 
code is optional.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
4. AUTOMATIC OPERATION OPERATION B-64694EN/01
- 848 -
Explanation
Retraction for rigid tapping by the G30 command is used when bit 1 (RG3) of parameter No. 5202 is 1.
If rigid tapping is interrupted due to a reset or emergency stop or if the power is turned off during rigid
tapping, executing the command above in MEM or MDI operation causes the tapping axis to move to the 
R point while synchronized with the spindle, based on the rigid tapping command information in the 
machining program.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
machining program.
The command for retraction for rigid tapping is a one shot command.
The machining data for rigid tapping retraction is retained until the next rigid tapping command is 
specified, even after the power is turned off. Rigid tapping retraction can, therefore, be specified even 
after the power is turned off.
In the retraction for 3-dimensional rigid tapping, please command the 3-dimensional coordinate system


key: chroma:document
string_value:
conversion or tilted working plane command before the retraction for rigid tapping command. The 
command at this time, specify same arguments used when rigid tapping stops. Alarm PS5384, 
"RETRACT FOR RIGID CANNOT BE CMD." occurs if the specified arguments are different from those 
used at stopping.
NOTE
1 Retraction for rigid tapping by the G30 is not used when bit 1 (RG3) of 
parameter No. 5202 is 0.
2 In the retraction for rigid tapping by the G30, be sure to set bit 0 (G84) of


key: chroma:document
string_value:
parameter No. 5200 to 0.
Example
Machining program
M29 S1000 ;
G84 X20.0 Y20.0 R-10.0 Z-30.0 F500 ; 
X50.0 Y50.0 ;
X100.0 Y100.0 ;
G80
Retraction program
G30 P99 M29 S1000 ;
G00 Z-10.0 ;
 Fig. 4.14 Overview of retraction for rigid tapping function
Warning
WARNING
1 For rigid tapping retraction, the CNC internally activates a return program. Rigid
tapping retraction may, therefore, cause some G codes or M/F/S/L codes to be
overwritten (G80/G84/G74, G94/G95).


key: chroma:document
string_value:
2 During rigid tapping retraction, do not change any setting affecting the travel
distance (such as the increment system, input unit 10 time multiply, or
calculator-type decimal notation) that was made when machining data was
stored for rigid tapping retraction.
Initial point
R point
Stopping point
of tapping
Retract completion point
Z point


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64694EN/01 OPERATION 4. AUTOMATIC OPERATION
- 849 -
Caution
CAUTION
1 If rigid tapping is stopped as a result of an emergency stop, the position on the 
tapping axis (Z-axis) is maintained but the spindle position is lost. In such a case, 
therefore, the positional relationship between the spindle and tapping axis is not 
guaranteed when operation is resumed.
2 Rigid tapping retraction is performed based on the tapping axis (Z-axis)


key: chroma:document
string_value:
commands accumulated for tapping. If rigid tapping is stopped as a result of an 
emergency stop, therefore, rigid tapping retraction may fail to draw the tapping 
tool completely out of the workpiece. In such a case, set retract value α
(parameter No. 5382).
3 During rigid tapping retraction, switching the mode to the manual operation mode 
stops rigid tapping retraction, and decelerates and stops the machine.
4 If the power is turned off during rigid tapping motion by power failure or etc,


key: chroma:document
string_value:
when retraction for rigid tapping is executed after the power turned on, the
tapping axis (Z-axis) may be retracted additionally by the accumulated distance 
of acceleration/deceleration.
Note
NOTE
1 Rigid tapping retraction is not performed if the input increment (inches or 
millimeters) selected when machining data is stored for rigid tapping retraction 
differs from that selected when rigid tapping retraction is executed.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
2 Override can be applied to rigid tapping retraction when override during 
extraction in rigid tapping is validated. (bit 4 (DOV) of parameter No. 5200 is 1)


key: chroma:document
string_value:
5. TEST OPERATION OPERATION B-64694EN/01
- 850 -
5 TEST OPERATION
The following functions are used to check before actual machining whether the machine operates as 
specified by the created program.
5.1 MACHINE LOCK AND AUXILIARY FUNCTION LOCK
To display the change in the position without moving the tool, use machine lock.
There are two types of machine lock: all-axis machine lock, which stops the movement along all axes,


key: chroma:document
string_value:
and specified-axis machine lock, which stops the movement along specified axes only. In addition, 
auxiliary function lock, which disables M, S, T, and B (2nd auxiliary function) commands, is available 
for checking a program together with machine lock.
Tool
Display unit
X
Y
Z
The tool does not move but the position 
along each axis changes on the display.
Workpiece
. . . . . . . . . 
Fig. 5.1 Machine lock
5.1.1 Machine Lock
Procedure


key: chroma:document
string_value:
5.1.1 Machine Lock
Procedure
Press the machine lock switch on the operator's panel. The tool does not move but the position along each 
axis changes on the display as if the tool were moving.
Some machines have a machine lock switch for each axis. On such machines, press the machine lock 
switches for the axes along which the tool is to be stopped. Refer to the appropriate manual provided by 
the machine tool builder for machine lock.
CAUTION


key: chroma:document
string_value:
CAUTION
The positional relationship between the workpiece coordinates and machine 
coordinates may differ before and after automatic operation using machine lock. 
In such a case, specify the workpiece coordinate system by using a coordinate 
setting command or by performing manual reference position return.
Limitation
- Automatic operation in the machine lock state (M, S, T, and B commands)
Machine lock applies only to move commands along controlled axes. Updating modal G codes or setting


key: chroma:document
string_value:
a coordinate system is performed normally. M, S, T, and B (2nd auxiliary function) commands are also 
performed normally.
- Reference position return under machine lock
When a G27, G28, or G30 command is issued in the machine lock state, the command is accepted but the 
tool does not move to the reference position and the reference position return LED does not go on.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64694EN/01 OPERATION 5. TEST OPERATION
- 851 -
- Selecting a machine coordinate system (G53)
When a positioning of machine coordinate system (G53) is specified in the machine lock state, move 
commands are invalid and absolute coordinates and relative coordinates are not updated.
When machine lock is applied during G53 movement, output pulses (move commands) to the servo 
motors are stopped and machine coordinates are not updated. The absolute and relative coordinates are 
updated.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
updated.
- High precision oscillation function
Do not switch machine lock signal to the oscillation axis during oscillation motion, otherwise an alarm 
PS5050 "ILL-COMMAND IN G81.1 MODE" is issued.
- Manual intervention and return
Do not perform manual intervention in the machine lock state, otherwise the tool might move to wrong 
position in return operation.
- Tool retract and recover
Do not perform manual retraction in the machine lock state, otherwise the tool might move to wrong


key: chroma:document
string_value:
position in recovery.
- Program restart / Quick program restart
The tool cannot be returned to a correct position under the following conditions.
- Manual operation is performed in the machine lock state.
- When program restart is specified in the machine lock state, then the machine lock is canceled.
- Type for counting time of tool management function
The count-up operation is not performed in the machine lock state.
- High-speed program check function


key: chroma:document
string_value:
During the high-speed program check mode, all-axis machine lock signal MLK and each-axis machine 
lock signals MLK1 to MLK8 are invalid except for PMC control axis.
5.1.2 Auxiliary Function Lock
Procedure
Press the auxiliary function lock switch on the operator's panel. M, S, T, and B codes are disabled and not 
executed. Refer to the appropriate manual provided by the machine tool builder for auxiliary function 
lock.
Limitation
- M codes not locked by auxiliary function lock


key: chroma:document
string_value:
M00, M01, M02, M30, M98, M99, and M198 (subprogram call function) commands are executed even in 
the auxiliary function lock state. M codes for calling a subprogram (parameters Nos. 6071 to 6079) and 
those for calling a custom macro (parameters Nos. 6080 to 6089) are also executed.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
5. TEST OPERATION OPERATION B-64694EN/01
- 852 -
5.2 FEEDRATE OVERRIDE
A programmed feedrate can be reduced or increased by a percentage (%) selected by the override dial. 
This feature is used to check a program.
For example, when a feedrate of 100 mm/min is specified in the program, setting the override dial to 50% 
moves the tool at 50 mm/min.
Tool
Check the machining by
altering the feedrate from
the value specified in the
program.
Feedrate 100 mm/min
(Specified by programmed)


key: chroma:document
string_value:
(Specified by programmed)
Feedrate 50 mm/min after
feedrate override
Workpiece
Fig. 5.2 Feedrate override
Feedrate override
Procedure
Set the feedrate override dial to the desired percentage (%) on the machine operator's panel, before or 
during automatic operation.
On some machines, the same dial is used for the feedrate override dial and jog feedrate dial. Refer to the 
appropriate manual provided by the machine tool builder for feedrate override.
Limitation
- Override range


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Limitation
- Override range
The override that can be specified ranges from 0 to 254%. For individual machines, the range depends on 
the specifications of the machine tool builder.
- Override during thread
During the threading process, the override setting is ignored; it is always regarded as 100% during the 
process.
5.3 RAPID TRAVERSE OVERRIDE
An override can be applied to the rapid traverse rate. F0 is set by a parameter No. 1421.
Fig. 5.3 Rapid traverse override


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64694EN/01 OPERATION 5. TEST OPERATION
- 853 -
Rapid traverse override
Procedure
Select the override by the rapid traverse override switch during rapid traverse. Refer to the appropriate 
manual provided by the machine tool builder for rapid traverse override.
Explanation
The following types of rapid traverse are available. Rapid traverse override can be applied for each of 
them.
(1) Rapid traverse by G00
(2) Rapid traverse during a canned cycle
(3) Rapid traverse in G27, G28, G29, G30, G53


key: chroma:document
string_value:
(4) Manual rapid traverse
(5) Rapid traverse of manual reference position return
5.4 DRY RUN
The tool is moved at the feedrate specified by a parameter regardless of the feedrate specified in the 
program. This function is used for checking the movement of the tool under the state that the workpiece is 
removed from the table.
Tool
Table
Fig. 5.4 Dry run
Dry run
Procedure
Press the dry run switch on the machine operator's panel during automatic operation.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
The tool moves at the feedrate specified in a parameter. The rapid traverse switch can also be used for 
changing the feedrate.
Refer to the appropriate manual provided by the machine tool builder for dry run.
Explanation
- Dry run feedrate
The dry run feedrate changes as shown in the Table 5.4 according to the rapid traverse switch and 
parameters.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
5. TEST OPERATION OPERATION B-64694EN/01
- 854 -
Table 5.4
Rapid traverse 
switch
Program command
Rapid traverse Cutting feed
ON Rapid traverse rate Dry run feedrate × Jvmax(*2)
OFF Dry run feedrate × JV, or rapid traverse rate (*1) Dry run feedrate × JV(*2)
Max. cutting feedrate....................................................................Setting by parameter No.1430
Rapid traverse rate........................................................................Setting by parameter No.1420


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Dry run feedrate ...........................................................................Setting by parameter No.1410
(
*
1) Dry run feedrate × JV when bit 6 (RDR) of parameter No. 1401 is 1. Rapid traverse rate when 
parameter RDR is 0.
JV Jog feedrate override
(
*
2) Clamped to the maximum cutting feedrate
Jvmax Maximum value of jog feedrate override
5.5 SINGLE BLOCK
Pressing the single block switch starts the single block mode. When the cycle start button is pressed in the


key: chroma:document
string_value:
single block mode, the tool stops after a single block in the program is executed. Check the program in 
the single block mode by executing the program block by block.
Tool
Cycle start
Stop Stop
Stop
Workpiece
Cycle start Cycle start
Fig. 5.5 (a) Single block
Single block
Procedure
(1) Turn the single block switch on the machine operator’s panel on.
(2) Press the cycle start button. The machine executes one block and stops.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
(3) Press the cycle start button again. The machine executes the next one block and stops.
Refer to the appropriate manual provided by the machine tool builder for single block execution.
Explanation
- Reference position return and single block
If G28, G29, and G30 are issued, the single block function is effective at the intermediate point.
- Single block during a canned cycle
In a canned cycle, the single block stop points are the end of <1>, <2>, and <6> shown below. When the


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64694EN/01 OPERATION 5. TEST OPERATION
- 855 -
<6>
<1>
<2>
<4>
<5>
Rapid 
traverse
<3> Cutting feed
Fig. 5.5 (b) Single block during canned cycle
- Subprogram call and single block
Single block stop is not performed in a block containing M98P_;. M99; or G65.
However, single block stop is even performed in a block with M98P_ or M99 command, if the block
contains an address other than O, N, P, L.
5.6 HIGH SPEED PROGRAM CHECK FUNCTION


key: chroma:document
string_value:
When the cycle start button is pressed with the high speed program check mode set to be enabled, the 
program syntax and stroke limit are checked without axis movement.
A program check is performed at the maximum speed that can be specified by the CNC, regardless of the 
specified speed.
High speed program check
Procedure
(1) Perform position of the machine at the start position of the machining program in advance.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Set the workpiece coordinate system or tool compensation to the same state as in actual machining.
(2) Reset the CNC and press the high speed program check switch on the machine operator's panel to 
enter the high speed program check mode. In the high speed program check mode, "PRG-CHK" 
blinks at the lower-left of the CNC screen.
(3) Press the cycle start button to execute the program without axis movement. The feedrate is the


key: chroma:document
string_value:
maximum speed that can be specified by the CNC, regardless of the specified speed.
The program syntax and stroke limit are checked during execution of the program.
(4) Upon completion of the check, reset the CNC and release the high speed program check mode with 
the switch on the machine operator's panel.
Explanation
- Stroke Limit Check
Following the stroke limit check is executed without axes movements during the high speed program 
check mode.
- Stored stroke check 1


key: chroma:document
string_value:
- Stored stroke check 1
- Stored stroke check 2, 3
- Stroke limit check before move
If an alarm about the stroke limit occurs in the high speed program check mode, clear the alarm as 
described below.
(1) Change the mode to other than MEM or DNC.
(2) Reset the CNC.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
5. TEST OPERATION OPERATION B-64694EN/01
- 856 -
WARNING
1 If the machine coordinate system is not established, a stroke limit check is not 
performed correctly. When a reference position return is completed after 
power-on, perform a high speed program check.
2 When the width of the prohibited area is small in a stored stroke limit 2 and 3 
check, if a command to intersect the prohibited area in one block is issued, the 
stroke limit may not be detected. This means that a program not causing a


key: chroma:document
string_value:
stroke check alarm in a high speed program check may cause an alarm in actual 
operation.
- Program Check Feedrate
During the high speed program check mode, the feedrate of program execution becomes the maximum 
feedrate of CNC system regardless of the specified feedrate.
The feedrate clamp, override and dry run are not effective.
The execution speed of circular interpolation can be selected by bit 7 (PGF) of parameter No. 1490 from 
the maximum speed and dry run speed.
NOTE


key: chroma:document
string_value:
NOTE
1 The execution time of dwell is the same as a normal operation.
2 The alarm PS011, “FEED ZERO ( COMMAND )” occurs when there is no F 
command in a normal operation. However, it is executed at maximum speed 
without the alarm in the high speed program check mode even if there is no F 
command.
- Workpiece Coordinate System Preset
Upon completion of the high speed program check mode, the workpiece coordinate system is


key: chroma:document
string_value:
automatically preset. This enables program operation without making a reference position return upon 
completion of a program check. For details, refer to the manual provided by the machine tool builder.
WARNING
When the coordinate system is set before the high speed program check mode 
is turned on by the work coordinate system setting G92 (machining center 
system and G code system B or C of the lathe system), G50 (G code system A


key: chroma:document
string_value:
of the lathe system) and the local coordinate system setting G52, their setting 
values are deleted by the execution of the work coordinate system preset.
- Machine Coordinate Display for Program Check
During the high speed program check mode, it is possible to change the display of machine coordinates 
from the actual machine coordinates to the machine coordinates for the program check by setting bit 7 
(PGM) of parameter No.11320.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
(PGM) of parameter No.11320.
And it is possible to change the display of machine coordinate for each axis from the actual machine 
coordinate to the machine coordinate for the program check by setting bit 4 (PGA) of parameter No.3115.
- Tool life
If tool life management command or tool management command is specified during the high speed 
program check mode, tool life is not counted.
- Unavailable command


key: chroma:document
string_value:
- Unavailable command
Following functions can not be specified during the high speed program check mode. If the following
functions are specified, the alarm PS5364, “ILLEGAL COMMAND IN PROGRAM CHECK” occurs.
- Electronic gear box


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64694EN/01 OPERATION 5. TEST OPERATION
- 857 -
- Commands not covered by a high speed program check
Auxiliary functions and other commands are not covered by a high speed program check. For details, 
refer to the manual provided by the machine tool builder.
5.7 MANUAL HANDLE RETRACE
Overview
In this function, the program can be executed both forward and backward with a manual handle (manual 
pulse generator) under automatic operation.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Therefore, errors of a program, interference, and so on can be checked easily by working a machine 
actually.
- Checking mode
In this mode, the program can be executed forward and backward and the program can be checked.
To change to the checking mode, it is necessary to change the mode to MEM mode, and the checking
mode signal MMOD is set to "1". This function makes the data to execute the program backward when 
the program is executed forward in the checking mode.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
To work a machine synchronizing with a pulse generated by a manual handle in the checking mode, the 
manual handle check signal MCHK is set to "1" in addition to the above-mentioned. As a result, it 
becomes possible to check the program with a manual handle.
NOTE
During the checking mode, it is not possible to change the parameter and offset.
- Forward movement with a manual handle
The "forward movement" is that the program is executed forward by turning a manual handle in the


key: chroma:document
string_value:
positive direction (when the manual handle check signal is set to "1".) or in no relation to rotation of a 
manual handle (when the manual handle check signal is set to "0".).
When the manual handle check signal is set to "1", the execution speed of the program is proportional to 
the number of rotations of a manual handle. The program is executed forward rapidly when a manual 
handle is turned to the positive direction rapidly. And, the program is executed forward slowly when a


key: chroma:document
string_value:
manual handle is turned to the positive direction slowly. The distance magnification traveled per pulse 
from manual handle can be switched as same as a usual manual handle feed function.
When the manual handle check signal is set to "0", the execution of the program is controlled as same as 
an automatic operation.
- Backward movement
The "backward movement " is that the program executed forward once is executed backward by turning a 
manual handle in the negative direction.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
The program can be executed backward only for the block executed forward. And, the number of blocks 
for it is about 190 blocks. This block number changes by the content of the commanded program.
The program is executed backward rapidly when a manual handle is turned to the negative direction 
rapidly. And the program is executed backward slowly when a manual handle is turned to the negative 
direction slowly. The distance traveled per pulse from manual handle can switch magnification as well as


key: chroma:document
string_value:
a usual manual handle feed.
NOTE
In the system which exceeds 4 paths and 20 axes, the maximum number of 
blocks which can move backward becomes about 97 blocks.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
5. TEST OPERATION OPERATION B-64694EN/01
- 858 -
Explanation
- Control by the manual handle
Program execution start
The checking mode signal MMOD is set to "1" in MEM mode in order to change the checking mode. 
Then, the program execution is begun by turning ST signal from "1" to "0".
If the manual handle check signal MCHK is set to "1" at this time, the execution of the program is 
controlled by a manual handle. The program is executed synchronizing with rotation of a manual handle.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
When a manual handle check signal MCHK is set to "0", it is controlled as usual execution. 
When check mode signal MMOD is set to "1" during the operation of the program, it is enabled a check 
mode from the block that next buffering is done.
That is, even if check mode signal set to "1", check mode is not always enabled at once.
When check mode is enabled, check mode confirmation signal MMMOD is set to "1".
NOTE
After the signal MMOD is turned to "0" during the execution of the program, the


key: chroma:document
string_value:
program cannot be executed forward and backward.
Control with the manual handle
The value of the parameter No.6410 and the scale factors decide the moving speed of the machine by one
pulse generated by a manual handle.
When a manual handle is turned, the actual movement speed of the machine is as follows.
[Feedrate command value] × [Number of the handle pulse per a second]× [Handle magnification]
× ([Parameter setting value]/100) × (8/1000) (mm/min or inch/min)


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Example) When feedrate command value is 30mm/min, handle magnification is 100, parameter No.6410 
is set to 1 and manual pulse generator is rotated at 100 pulse/rev, the feedrate of axis is decided as follow.
[Feedrate]=30[mm/min] × 100[pulse/s] × 100 × (1/100) × (8/1000)[s] =24[mm/min]
When the feedrate exceeds the override 100% feedrate by turning a manual handle rapidly, the feedrate is 
clamped at the speed of override 100%. That is, if the pulse of the following formula exceeds "1", the


key: chroma:document
string_value:
feedrate is clamped.
[Number of the handle pulse per a second]
× [Handle magnification] × ([Parameter setting value]/100) × (8/1000)
The rapid traverse feedrate is clamped at 10%. However, the feedrate of the rapid traverse is clamped at 
100% when bit 0 (HDRPD) of parameter No.6400 is set to "1".
And if parameter No.6405 is set to an optional value, it can be clamped to override by nearly optional 
value.
When the parameter No.6405 is set to larger value than "100", it is clamped to nearly 100%.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
When parameter No.6405 is set to "0", the setting of bit 0 (RPO) of parameter No.6400 becomes valid.
The single block signal and the feed hold signal are effective in the checking mode. When the execution 
of a program is stopped by the single block stop or the feed hold stop, it is necessary to turn ST signal 
from "1" to "0" in order to restart the program.
In the block with the movement and the block of dwell, the execution speed of the program can be


key: chroma:document
string_value:
controlled by turning a manual handle. As for the block of neither movement nor dwell such as the block 
of only address M, S, T, and F, the program advances to the following block even if a manual handle does 
not turn.
The rotation of the spindle does not synchronize with a pulse of a manual handle. During the checking 
mode, the spindle rotates at the specified rotation speed. As for the feed per revolution, a program is


key: chroma:document
string_value:
executed at the feedrate which was converted from the rotation speed of the spindle to the corresponding
feed per minute inside CNC.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64694EN/01 OPERATION 5. TEST OPERATION
- 859 -
NOTE
The manual handle used by this function is always the first. The 2nd and 3rd 
manual handle cannot be used in this function.
Forward movement and backward movement with a manual handle
The program is executed forward when a manual handle is turned to the positive direction. And, the
program is executed backward when a manual handle is turned to the negative direction.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
The program is executed backward if a manual handle is turned to the negative direction in executing the 
program forward.
When a manual handle keeps being turned in a negative direction, the program is executed backward and 
the execution stops in the block of O number. Then, if a manual handle is turned to the positive direction, 
the program is executed forward again.
Even if a manual handle controls the program execution, the program is executed forward in no relation


key: chroma:document
string_value:
to a pulse generated by a manual handle on setting the manual handle check signal to "0".
The rotation amount of the manual handle is not accepted as an amount of the movement while changing 
forward movement and backward movement.
Program end
When the block of M2 or M30 is executed, the manual handle retrace ends. It is not possible to execute 
the program backward from the block of M2 or M30.
When the execution of the program ends, RESET signal must be set to "1", and the checking mode signal


key: chroma:document
string_value:
and the manual handle check signal must be set to "0".
In 2 path control system, FIN signal must not be set to "1" when the block of M2 or M30 is executed in 
only one of paths. After the block of M2 or M30 has been executed in both paths, FIN signal is set to "1".
(Except for the block of waiting M code is commanded before M2 or M30 in both paths.)
- Notice of the operation
- Dry-run can not operate during the checking mode. Dry-run signal must be set to "0".


key: chroma:document
string_value:
- Automatic operation starts immediately with the feedrate commanded by the program, when the 
checking mode signal or the synchronous operation with handle signal is turned off during executing 
the program in the checking mode. 
- The edit of the program and the change of the parameter and the offset must not be done. 
- While the program is being executed backward or blocks once executed backward are being 
executed forward again, do not change the checking mode signal MMOD.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
- The single block operation is also possible. However, even if the manual handle is operated in single 
block stop state, neither forward movement nor backward movement is done. If cycle start is done, 
the continuation of the program is executed in the same direction before a single block stop, and the 
manual handle becomes effective.
- Backward movement of each code
All modal information of G, T, S-code is memorized in executing the program forward. And, the


key: chroma:document
string_value:
memorized data of the modal G, T, S-code are used in executing the program backward. 
As for M-codes, they are grouped and the modal information is managed by parameter No.6411 to 6490. 
Therefore, M-code can be executed backward according to the information. As for the modal information 
of the M-code, a change in each group is memorized in the execution data.
As for the codes except for G, M, S, and T, the same code is output between forward movement and 
backward movement.
- G-code


key: chroma:document
string_value:
backward movement.
- G-code
If G-code that changes modal information is commanded in backward movement, the modal information 
of previous block is executed.
Example)
N1G99;
N2G01X_F_;


key: chroma:document
string_value:
5. TEST OPERATION OPERATION B-64694EN/01
- 860 -
N3X_Z_;
N4G98; ............................ backward movement starts from this block
N5X_Y_Z_;
If backward movement starts from N4 block, the modal information is changed from G98 to G99 and G99 
is executed from N3.
G-code with a movement is traced along the route opposite to forward movement.
G-code that can be command in executing the program backward is as follows.
The other G-codes cannot be command in executing the program backward.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
The G-codes in the G-code system B and C also can be used.
Lathe system
G00 G01 G02 G03 G04 G10 G11
G22 G23 G25 G26 G27 G28 G30
G40 G41 G42 G50 G53 G61 G63
G64 G65 G68 G70 G71 G72 G73
G75 G80 G83 G85 G87 G89 G90
G94 G96 G97 G98 G99
(G-code system A)
Machining center system
G00 G01 G02 G03 G04 G10 G11
G22 G23 G25 G26 G27 G28 G30
G40 G41 G42 G43 G44 G49 G53
G61 G63 G64 G65 G73 G76 G80
G81 G82 G83 G85 G86 G87 G88
G89 G82 G94 G95 G96 G97
NOTE


key: chroma:document
string_value:
G89 G82 G94 G95 G96 G97
NOTE
1 In Small-Hole Pecking Drilling Cycle(G83), backward movement is prohibited.
2 In forward movement of Boring Cycle(G88), the sequence of actions at bottom of 
hole is shown as follows (dwell -> stop of spindle motor -> hold state). But in 
backward movement, that is (rotation of spindle -> hold state -> dwell after 
restart). 
3 G68 for the lathe system means mirror image for double turret.
- M-code


key: chroma:document
string_value:
- M-code
If there is M-code in the same group is commanded in previous blocks, modal information of the M-code, 
commanded at the last in previous blocks, is output.
If no M-code is commanded in previous blocks, the M-code set to the first parameter in the same M-code 
group is output.
If M-code is not set to group M-code in parameter, the same M-code is output in backward movement.
If the bit 5 (RVN) of parameter No. 6400 is set to "1", the backward movement is prohibited when the


key: chroma:document
string_value:
M-code, which is not set to group M-code, is commanded in backward movement.
NOTE
When setting the bit 5(RVN) of parameter No.6400, backward movement 
prohibition is enabled except the M-code which was set in the grouping but 
backward movement can be enabled for the following M-code exceptionally.
1. Subprogram Call by M98/M99.
2. Subprogram Call using an M code
3. Macro Call using an M code
4. Waiting M code
5. M0


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64694EN/01 OPERATION 5. TEST OPERATION
- 861 -
Example)
Output of M-codes that are set to groups by parameters in backward movement
Setting of parameters:
Bit 2 (MC5) of parameter No.6400=1 and bit 3 (MC8) of parameter No.6400=0 (5 M-codes/group 
and 16 groups)
No.6411=100
No.6412=101
No.6413=102
No.6414=103
No.6415=104
No.6416=200
No.6417=201
No.6418=202
No.6419=203
No.6420=204
Program O10 is executed in forward movement from N1 to N15 and backward movement is executed


key: chroma:document
string_value:
from N15. In backward movement, the output of M-codes is shown as next table.
Table 5.7 (a)
Forward movement Backward movement
O10;
N1G4X1.;
N2M101; M101 M100 (*1)
N3G4X1.;
N4M204; M204 M200 (*1)
N5G4X1.;
N6M104; M104 M101 (*2)
N7G4X1.;
N8M300; M300 M300
N9G4X1.;
N10M200; M200 M204 (*1)
N11G4X1.;
N12M0; M0 M0 (*3)
N13G4X1.;
N14M102; M102 M104 (*2)
N15G4X1.; Backward movement starts from this block
M2;


key: chroma:document
string_value:
M2;
*1 No M-code in the same group is commanded before this block, so the M-code, which is set in the 1st. 
parameter of the same group, is output.
*2 M-code in the same group is commanded before this block, so the M-code, which is commanded at 
the last before this block, is output.
*3 M-code is not set to group M-code, so the same M-code is output.
- S and T-code
A modal value of the previous block is output.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
When movement command and S-code or T-code is commanded in the same block, the timing of the 
output of the S-code and T-code is different. Because, the timing where S-code and T-code are output at 
the forward movement is different from that at the backward movement. By setting bit 7 (STO) of 
parameter No.6401 to "1", the timing of the output of S and T code at the forward movement is the same 
as the one at the backward movement.
Example)
T-code output timing at the backward movement


key: chroma:document
string_value:
T-code is output as follows when the program proceeds backward after the forward movement to N8 
block.
Group A
Group B


key: chroma:document
string_value:
5. TEST OPERATION OPERATION B-64694EN/01
- 862 -
Table 5.7 (b)
Forward 
movement
Backward movement
Parameter STO=0 Parameter STO=1
O1000;
N1G98G00X0Z0; Default T output
N2G00X-10.T11; T11 output Default T output
N3G00X100.; T11 output
N4G00X10.Z20.T22; T22 output T11 output No T code output
N5G00X30.Z30.;
N6G00X-10.Z-20.; T22 output
N7G00X50.Z40.T33; T33 output T22 output T33 output
N8G04X5.; (Backward start) (Backward start)
M30;


key: chroma:document
string_value:
M30;
The “Default T” means a T-code status at N1 block in forward movement. If the status is T0, “T0” signal 
is output as “Default T” in the backward movement.
The timing of T-code output of N7 and N8 in O1000 shown in the example above is as follows.
N6
N7 N8
T33 output
Forward movement :
 with T22
N6
N7 N8
T22 output
Backward movement (When parameter STO is set to “0”) :
N6
N7
N8
T33 output
Backward movement (When parameter STO is set to “1”) :
T22 output
Fig. 5.7 (a)


key: chroma:document
string_value:
T22 output
Fig. 5.7 (a)
- Direction change prohibition
The direction change prohibition is a state not changing the direction where the program is executed.
In the state, even if the rotating direction of a manual handle is reversed, the reversed rotation is ignored.
A manual handle must be rotate in the same direction as present direction for removing this state.
The direction change prohibition can be confirmed by output signal MNCHG.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
It becomes the change prohibition state under the following condition.
- While the block with the code waiting for FIN is executing


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64694EN/01 OPERATION 5. TEST OPERATION
- 863 -
- After a block has done and until the next block begins to operate
- During thread cutting
- Modal G code of G68.1, G68 and G51.2
- The block with the axis that ends movement earlier in the block with G02 or nonlinear type position 
(G00) etc.
- During time waiting at the switching of blocks (for multi-path systems only. See "Time waiting in 
multi-path systems".)
- Backward movement prohibition


key: chroma:document
string_value:
The backward movement prohibition is a state that the program cannot be executed from a certain block 
backward. In this state, the negative rotation of a manual handle is ignored, and the only positive rotation 
is effective. The program must be executed forward by rotating a manual handle in the positive direction 
for removing this state.
The backward movement prohibition can be confirmed by output signal MRVSP.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
If the following blocks are executed in backward movement, backward movement is prohibited.
- Program number block of main program (except subprogram and macro program)
- Over the maximum number of the blocks for reverse movement
- The block including backward movement prohibition G-code (which is not described in the 
paragraph "G-code")
- The block which is executed while in modal including backward movement prohibition G-code
(which is not described in the paragraph "G-code")
- Status display


key: chroma:document
string_value:
- Status display
In manual handle retrace, the status of manual handle retrace is displayed on clock display of CNC state 
display line. This status display is displayed during the execution of manual handle retrace. The clock is 
displayed usually.
When the all condition is filled, "M.H.RTR." is displayed on clock display of CNC state display line. This 
status is displayed by the color of color number 3 (INPUT KEY, O/N NO. and STATUS are the same


key: chroma:document
string_value:
color). The screen display is as shown in Fig. 5.7 (b). When the following conditions are not full, the 
clock is displayed.
(1) When bit 2 (CHS) of parameter No.6401 is set to "0":
(a) Software option of handle manual retrace is enabled.
(b) Status display disable/enable bit 6 (HST) of parameter No.6401 is set to "1".
(c) Check mode confirmation signal MMMOD is set to "1".
(2) When bit 2 (CHS) of parameter No.6401 is set to "1":
(a) Software option of handle manual retrace is enabled.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
(b) Status display disable/enable bit 6 (HST) of parameter No.6401 is set to "1".
(c) Cycle start signal STL is set to "1".
(d) Check mode signal MMOD is set to "1".
(e) Manual handle check signal MCHK is set to "1".


key: chroma:document
string_value:
5. TEST OPERATION OPERATION B-64694EN/01
- 864 -
Fig. 5.7 (b) "M.H.RTR." status display
Besides, when reverse movement prohibition signal MRVSP is set to "1",
the "NO RVRS." is displayed. This status is displayed by blinking/reversing in the color of color number 
1 (ALARM is the same color). The screen display is as shown in Fig. 5.7 (c). When reverse movement 
prohibition signal MRVSP is set to "0", the " M.H.RTR." is displayed again.
Fig. 5.7 (c) " NO RVRS." status display


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Besides, when direction change prohibition signal MNCHG is set to "1" and the direction of program’s 
execution is changed by manual handle, this status display changes from "M.H.RTR." to "NO.CHAG.".
This status is displayed by blinking/reversing in the color of color number 3 (INPUT KEY, O/N NO. and
STATUS are the same color) . The screen display is shown as Fig. 5.7 (d). When the program is executed


key: chroma:document
string_value:
in the direction as the same as before by manual handle or direction change prohibition signal MNCHG is 
set to "0", the " M.H.RTR." is displayed again.
Moreover, when bit 1 (FWD) of parameter No. 6400 is set to "1" and the program is executed to change 
direction by manual handle, this status display changes from "M.H.RTR." to "NO.CHAG.".


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64694EN/01 OPERATION 5. TEST OPERATION
- 865 -
NOTE
When the improvement of direction change movement in auxiliary function 
output block is enabled, the state of direction change prohibition signal MNCHG 
is set to "1" and direction change is possible. Therefore please note that the 
status display of the direction change prohibition is displayed though it is 
possible to direction change.
Fig. 5.7 (d) "NO.CHAG." status display
Limitation


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Limitation
- Movement in automatic operation by DNC operation mode(RMT)
In the automatic operation by DNC operation mode(RMT), the backward movement is prohibited though 
the forward movement is enable.
- Movement in subprogram operation by external subprogram call
In M198 or M-code for subprogram operation by external subprogram call (parameter No.6030), the 
backward movement is prohibited though the forward movement is enable.
- Movement command and M,S,T-code


key: chroma:document
string_value:
When M,S,T-codes and movement commands are in the same block, the timing outputting codes changes 
between in forward movement and backward movement. Therefore, M, S, T-codes should be commanded
in backward movement after confirming that distribution end signal DEN is set to "1".
Example of executing the following programs with lathe system
O0001 ;
M5 S0 F0 ;
G53 X0 Z0 ; ........................................................................................ (1)


key: chroma:document
string_value:
G1 W100 M3 S100 F1. ;..................................................................... (2)
G0 U50. W50. ;................................................................................... (3)
M2 ;


key: chroma:document
string_value:
5. TEST OPERATION OPERATION B-64694EN/01
- 866 -
[Forward movement]
(1)G53 X0 Z0
(3) G0 U50 W50
(2) G1 W100.
M3 S100 F1.
The block of (2) moves with M3 S100 F1.
[Backward movement]
(1)G53 X0 Z0
(3) G0 U50. W50.
(2)G1 W100.
M5 S0 F1.
The block of (2) moves with M5 S0 F1.
Fig. 5.7 (e)
- Non linear interpolation type positioning
In the non-linear interpolation type positioning, the route is different between forward movement and 
backward movement.
The route of forward movement


key: chroma:document
string_value:
The route of forward movement
The route of backward movement
X
Z
Fig. 5.7 (f)
Please use the interpolation type positioning to ward off danger. (Set the bit 1 (LRP) of parameter 
No.1401 to "1")
If the non-linear interpolation type positioning is used, backward movement is prohibited at the time 
when movement ends on any axis.
- Threading
When bit 6 (HRG) of parameter No.6403 is set to 0, threading (G32,G76,G84,G88,G92) is always


key: chroma:document
string_value:
executed at 100% override speed. That is to say, a pulse generated by a manual handle is ignored in 
executing a threading block. In thread cutting cycle, the pulse is invalid at the time actually cutting thread, 
but the one are valid in the other movements.
When bit 6 (HRG) of parameter No.6403 is set to 1, it is possible to move backward and re-forward in the 
block of threading. However, threading cycle (G92) and multiple threading cycle (G76) are excluded.
WARNING


key: chroma:document
string_value:
WARNING
When the parameter HRG is set to 1, detach the work if you execute the 
program including the threading because the synchronization of the spindle and 
the feed axis is not maintained at threading block. The machining of work is 
impossible.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64694EN/01 OPERATION 5. TEST OPERATION
- 867 -
- Rigid tapping (lathe system)
When bit 6 (HRG) of parameter No.6403 is set to 1, it is possible to move backward and re-forward in the 
block of rigid tapping. However, it is not possible to move backward by passing an on-off command of 
the rigid tapping mode.
WARNING
When the parameter HRG is set to 1, detach the work if you execute the 
program including the rigid tapping. The machining of work is impossible.
- Tapping mode (G63)


key: chroma:document
string_value:
- Tapping mode (G63)
When bit 6 (HRG) of parameter No.6403 is set to 1, it is possible to move backward and re-forward in the 
tapping mode.
WARNING
When the parameter HRG is set to 1, detach the work if you execute the 
program including the tapping mode because the synchronization of the spindle 
and the feed axis is not maintained. The machining of work is impossible.
- Macro variable
In macro statement, the setting, operation, and so on of the macro variable is executed in only first


key: chroma:document
string_value:
forward movement. That is to say, the setting, operation, and so on of the macro variable is never 
executed in the block executing them once.
- Macro modal call
Manual handle retrace function is effective to macro modal call (G66,G66.1).
- Macro executor (execution macro)
Manual handle retrace function is effective while the execution macro of macro executor is called.
- Interruption type custom macro


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Do not execute backward movement or re-forward movement after executing the interruption program of 
interruption type custom macro.
- Manual handle interrupt
Do not operate the manual handle interrupt simultaneously with manual handle retrace function.
- PMC axis control
The movement of PMC axis control cannot be controlled by this function.
- Multiple path simultaneous check in the multi-path system


key: chroma:document
string_value:
When using the manual handle retrace function at the same time in multiple paths, the timing of block 
operation may slightly differ between these paths due to the repetition of forward and backward motion or 
differences in the rotation speed of the manual handle. To synchronize block operation between the paths, 
use the wait M code.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
5. TEST OPERATION OPERATION B-64694EN/01
- 868 -
- Time waiting in multi-path systems
In a multi-path system, control is performed so that during forward movement, the sum of the handle 
pulses input from the start to the end of each block is stored and during backward movement, the tool 
does not move to the previous block until as many handle pulses as those stored during forward 
movement are input. Any handle pulses that are input in an in-position check are also stored as part of the


key: chroma:document
string_value:
pulses mentioned above. If, therefore, the rotation speed of the handle (that is, the axis movement speed) 
during forward movement differs from that during backward movement, the time required for the 
in-position check varies, causing a difference between the sum of the handle pulses stored during forward 
movement and the sum of the handle pulses during backward movement. If this occurs, even if the block


key: chroma:document
string_value:
ends during movement (the distance-to-go display is 0), the tool may not move to the previous block until 
the handle is rotated in the backward movement direction for as many handle pulses as those stored 
during forward movement. Moreover, in such a case, a direction change is prohibited and, therefore, it is 
not possible to switch to forward movement until the tool moves to the previous block by continuing 
backward movement.
- Check of path unit by multi-path system


key: chroma:document
string_value:
In the multi-path system, the program check of an arbitrary path is possible. In the path not to check, 
please select the mode excluding the MEM mode. Even if bit 4 (HMP) of parameter No.6400 is set to "1", 
it is possible to execute the check of forward movement, direction change and backward movement.
If waiting M code exist in the program, please set No-wait signal of two path NOWT, or No-wait signal 
of three path NMWT to "1".
- Modal display


key: chroma:document
string_value:
- Modal display
In the backward movement with manual handle, the modal display is updated according to the operation 
condition of the program.
- Modal information
In the backward movement with manual handle, the state of modal information is updated according to 
the operation condition of the program.
- Change in operation mode
When you change to EDIT mode during the checking mode, the backward movement and the re-forward


key: chroma:document
string_value:
movement cannot be executed in the blocks which have been already executed.
- ON/OFF of Manual Handle Retrace mode
When check mode signal MMOD is set to "0" and handle available signal in checking mode MCHK is set 
to "0", the check mode might not be turned off at once.
Basically, in the middle of block, the check mode doesn't switch from ON to OFF or from OFF to ON. 
After the block is ended, the check mode switches from ON to OFF or from OFF to ON.
- AI contour control


key: chroma:document
string_value:
- AI contour control
If the checking mode signal MMOD is "1", AI contour control mode (G05.1Q1) is canceled. If AI 
contour control is canceled, forward movement and backward movement can be executed.
Furthermore, when check mode signal MMOD<Gn067.2> is set to 1 in AI contour control mode, it is 
enabled a check mode from the block that next buffering is done. Then, AI contour control is canceled.
When parameter FWD (No.6400#1) and parameter HAI (No.6403#7) are 1, AI contour control is


key: chroma:document
string_value:
effective in the checking mode. Even if it is already AI contour control mode, the checking mode is
effective.
- Multi Spindle
During the backward movement, both TYPE-A and TYPE-B multi spindle control may not be operated 
exactly.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64694EN/01 OPERATION 5. TEST OPERATION
- 869 -
- Handle-synchronous feed
When manual handle retrace and a handle-synchronous feed are operated at the same time, forward 
movement and backward movement are done according to the operation of the first manual handle, and 
the feedrate of a handle-synchronous feed becomes effective.
- Execution of measurement G-code with the speed of override 100%
When bit 6 (MGO) of parameter No.6400 is set to "1", a handle pulse is invalid and it is always executed


key: chroma:document
string_value:
at 100% override. When bit 6 (MGO) of parameter No.6400 is set to "0", this function is invalid and a 
handle pulse is valid.
In the multi-path system, this function is not effective in the execution of another path and handle pulse is 
valid in another path. The measurement G code to which this function is effective is as follows.
(1) G31 for skip
(2) G31, G31P1, G31P2, G31P3, G31P4, G04, G04Q1, G04Q2, G04Q3 and G04Q4 for multistage skip
(3) G31P99 and G31P98 for torque limit skip


key: chroma:document
string_value:
When the measurement by G36 and G37 (G37.1 and G37.2 when bit 3(G36) of parameter No.3405 is set 
to "1") of automatic tool compensation is executed, a handle pulse is invalid and it is always executed at 
100% override regardless of setting bit 6 (MGO) of parameter No.6400. At the rapid traverse before 
measurement, handle pulse is valid.
When bit 7 (SKF) of parameter No.6200 is set to "0" and bit 2 (SFN) of parameter No.6207 is set to "0",


key: chroma:document
string_value:
handle pulse at G31 is invalid and it is always executed at 100% override regardless of setting bit 6 
(MGO) of parameter No.6400.
When bit 7 (MG4) of parameter No.6400 is set to "1" and the software option of multistage skip is 
enabled and the setting of bits 0 (IS1) of parameter No. 6202 to bit 7 (DS8) of parameter No. 6206 is 
enabled, the backward movement prohibition is enabled in G04 block for multistage skip.
The G code to which this function is effective is as follows.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
(1) G04, G04Q1, G04Q2, G04Q03 and G04Q4 for multistage skip
- Skip function, Multi-step skip function, High-speed skip function and Torque 
limit skip function
When bit 5 (HRF) of parameter No.6403 is set to 1, it is possible to move backward and re-forward in the 
block of G31.
During the backward movement or the re-forward movement, any skip signal and torque limit are ignored 
and it moves backward or re-forward on the path that moved first time forward movement.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
The system variables #100151 to #100182 and #5061 to #5080 of custom macro are not updated during 
the backward movement and the re-forward movement.
- Reference position return check (G27)
The reference position return end signals ZP1 to ZP8 <Fn094> is not output in the backward movement.
- Polar coordinate interpolation
- Cylindrical interpolation
- 3-dimensional coordinate system conversion
It is not possible to move backward by passing an on-off block of these modes though it is possible to


key: chroma:document
string_value:
move backward and re-forward in these modes.
- Relation to another function
This function cannot coexist with the following functions
- Retrace


key: chroma:document
string_value:
5. TEST OPERATION OPERATION B-64694EN/01
- 870 -
5.7.1 Displaying Program Being Executed in Backward Movement
Overview
During executing the program backward by manual handle retrace, the block just before the block being 
executed can be displayed.
Therefore, it is possible to check what the block to be executed next is in backward movement.
Explanation
In displaying program being executed in backward movement, it is possible to select whether to display


key: chroma:document
string_value:
the block being executed or the block just before the block being executed at the start of the program.
Selecting method is as follows.
(1) To display the block being executed at the start of the program
Set bit 2 (RPD) of parameter No.11370 to 0.
(2) To display the block just before the block being executed at the start of the program
Set bit 2 (RPD) of parameter No.11370 to 1.
Furthermore, in a display containing look-ahead blocks (bit 1 (APD) of parameter No.11350 to 0),


key: chroma:document
string_value:
set bit 3 (FPD) of parameter No.11308 to 1.
When setting the case (2), the block just before the block selected by the cursor can be displayed.
- For a display containing look-ahead blocks (bit 1 (APD) of parameter No.11350 = 0)
Fig. 5.7.1 (a) Displaying program being executed in backward movement
- For a text display (bit 1 (APD) of parameter No.11350 = 1)
Fig. 5.7.1 (b) Displaying program being executed in backward movement


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64694EN/01 OPERATION 5. TEST OPERATION
- 871 -
5.8 AUXILIARY FUNCTION OUTPUT BLOCK REVERSE 
MOVEMENT FOR MANUAL HANDLE RETRACE
Overview
This function enables reverse movement during manual handle retrace even if a move command and an 
auxiliary function (M/S/T/B code) are specified in the same block.
Notes
NOTE
1 When a single auxiliary function is specified individually, carry out the regular 
auxiliary function completion sequence. Reverse movement becomes possible


key: chroma:document
string_value:
after moving to the next (or previous) block.
2 If a move command and an auxiliary function are specified in the same block and 
if no travel distance remains after movement, carry out the regular auxiliary 
function completion sequence. Reverse movement becomes possible after 
moving to the next (or previous) block.
3 To enable reverse movement using this function when an M code other than 
grouped M codes and a move command are specified in the same block, set bit


key: chroma:document
string_value:
5 (RVN) of parameter No. 6400 to "0".
4 This function is not supported for M02 or M30.
5 If an auxiliary function is specified in a block having no move command, such as 
G70, carry out the regular auxiliary function completion sequence.
Reverse movement becomes possible after moving to the next (or previous) 
block.
5.9 MANUAL HANDLE RETRACE FUNCTION FOR 
MULTI-PATH
Overview
In the manual handle retrace function for multi-path systems, when the operation of re-forward movement


key: chroma:document
string_value:
is performed, the movement timing of all-path movement can be made identical to that of forward 
movement. 
Explanation
In the manual handle retrace function for multi-path systems, when a certain path stopped with the 
backward movement prohibited and the other paths continue the backward movement, if re-forward 
movement is performed after that, all paths start the re-forward movement immediately, so the timing of 
block movement of each path is different from the original forward movement.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
In this function, during re-forward movement, the path that stopped with backward movement prohibited 
doesn’t start re-forward movement immediately. After other paths reach the position the path stopped 
with backward movement prohibited, the re-forward movement of this path is performed. Therefore, in 
multi-path systems, it is possible to perform re-forward movement in which the timing of block 
movement of each path is made identical to that of forward movement. 
NOTE


key: chroma:document
string_value:
NOTE
Even when this function is enabled, the timing of block movement of each path 
may differ slightly due to the repetition of forward and backward movement and 
the rotation speed of the manual handle. Therefore, when synchronization is 
necessary, use the waiting M code.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
5. TEST OPERATION OPERATION B-64694EN/01
- 872 -
Example) Re-forward movement of manual handle retrace in a 2-path system
Path1 Path2
O1001
N1 G1 X5.0 F1
N2 X12.0
N3 X22.0
N4 X30.0
N5 X34.5
N6 X50.0
M30
O1001
N1 G1 Z6.0 F1
N2 G31 Z14.0
N3 Z28.0
N4 Z36.0
N5 Z50.0
M30
When the above programs are operated in each path, the operation states of individual steps (in forward, 
backward, and re-forward movement) are shown below.
Path1
Path2
N1 N2 N3 N4 N5
N1 N2 N3 N4
Step1
Step1
Step2


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Step1
Step1
Step2
Step2
Step3
Step3
Step4
Step5
Step4
Step5
Step6 Step7
Step8
Step9
Step6
Step7
Step8
Step9
Fig. 5.9 (a)
STEP 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Command state Forward Backward Backward Backward Backward Re-forward Re-forward Re-forward Re-forward
Execution state 
in Path1
Forward Backward Backward Backward Backward Re-forward Re-forward Re-forward Re-forward
Execution state 
in Path2
Forward Backward Backward Stop Stop Wait P1 Wait P1 Re-forward Re-forward


key: chroma:document
string_value:
However, when bit 4 (HMP) of parameter No. 6400 is 0 (even if a path is prohibited from changing 
movement direction, the other paths can still change it), if operation is performed in the condition shown 
in the example below, re-forward movement may not keep the same motion as in forward movement.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64694EN/01 OPERATION 5. TEST OPERATION
- 873 -
Example)
Conditions of the programs of the individual paths 
Path1 In backward movement, there is a block that prohibits a change to forward movement. 
Path2 In backward movement, there is neither block that prohibits backward movement nor block 
that prohibits a change to forward movement.
In the above conditions, the following operation is performed. 
Fig. 5.9 (b)
STEP1: Forward movement is performed to position A in the figure.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
STEP2, STEP3: Backward movement is performed to position C in the figure. 
STEP4, STEP5: Re-forward movement is performed to position A in the figure. Since path 1 is 
prohibited from changing its direction, only path 2 performs re-forward movement.
To keep synchronization in re-forward movement, perform backward movement of path 1 until path 
1 passes by block D, which prohibits a direction change, and start re-forward movement of path 1.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
In this case, if bit 4 (HMP) of parameter No.6400 is set to 1 (if a path is prohibited from changing its 
movement direction, the other paths cannot also change their direction), the other paths cannot 
change their direction until path 1 passes by the position D.
Fig. 5.9 (c)
STEP1’: Forward movement is performed to position A in the figure.
STEP2’,STEP3’: Backward movement is performed to position D in the figure. 
STEP4’,STEP5: Re-forward movement is performed to position A in the figure. 
STEP1


key: chroma:document
string_value:
STEP1
STEP1
Program
start D C B A 
Block that prohibits a 
direction change STEP2
STEP2
STEP3
STEP3
STEP4
STEP4
STEP5
STEP5
Path1
Path2
STEP1’
STEP1’
Program
start D C B A 
Block that prohibits a 
direction change STEP2’
STEP2’
STEP3’
STEP3’
STEP4’
STEP4’
STEP5’
STEP5’
Path1
Path2


key: chroma:document
string_value:
5. TEST OPERATION OPERATION B-64694EN/01
- 874 -
5.10 EXTENSION OF THE MANUAL HANDLE RETRACE 
FUNCTION
Overview
In manual handle retrace function, the following operations that were impossible so far become available.
(1) Forward movement of rigid tapping
(2) Forward movement of threading
(3) Forward movement of PMC axis control
(4) Backward movement of the orientation by the G00 command on the Cs contour control axis
(5) Backward movement of polygon turning with two spindles


key: chroma:document
string_value:
(6) Backward movement of balance cutting
This function is included in the multi-path manual handle retrace function.
Explanation
- Rigid tapping
- When the bit 0 (HRA) of parameter No.6403 is set to 0 (Conventional specification)
(a) When rigid tapping starts during forward movement, handle operation is disabled and rigid 
tapping is executed at a speed of 100% override.
(b) Backward movement cannot be performed in the rigid tapping mode. In addition, when the


key: chroma:document
string_value:
rigid tapping block is reached after rigid tapping is completed in forward movement, backward 
movement cannot be done any more.
- When the bit 0 (HRA) of parameter No.6403 is set to 1 (Extensional specification)
(a) In tapping during forward movement, the operation is performed at a speed according to handle 
operation. 
(b) Backward movement in rigid tapping is the same movement as in the case where bit 0 (HRA) 
of parameter No. 6403 is 0.
- Thread cutting


key: chroma:document
string_value:
- Thread cutting
- When the bit 0 (HRA) of parameter No.6403 is set to 0 (Conventional specification)
(a) When the threading block is reached during forward movement, handle operation become 
disabled and the operation is performed at a speed of 100% override.
(b) Backward movement cannot be performed during threading. In addition, when the threading
block is reached during backward movement after threading is completed in forward movement, 
backward movement cannot be done any more.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
- When the bit 0 (HRA) of parameter No.6403 is set to 1 (Extensional specification)
(a) In threading during forward movement, the operation is performed at a speed according to 
handle operation. 
(b) Backward movement in threading is the same movement as in the case where bit 0 (HRA) of 
parameter No. 6403 is 0. 
WARNING
In rigid tapping or threading during manual handle retrace, the workpiece cannot 
be actually machined.
- PMC axis control


key: chroma:document
string_value:
- PMC axis control
- When the bit 1 (HRB) of parameter No.6403 is set to 0 (Conventional specification)
(a) The PMC axis operates independently of handle operation.
- When the bit 1 (HRB) of parameter No.6403 is set to 1 (Extensional specification)
(b) In PMC axis control during forward movement, the PMC axis is operated at a speed according 
to handle operation but, backward movement cannot be performed.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64694EN/01 OPERATION 5. TEST OPERATION
- 875 -
NOTE
1 Even when the axis specified by the program moves backward, the axis
specified by PMC axis control cannot move backward. Therefore, the relative 
position between the axis specified by the program and the axis specified by 
PMC axis control changes when backward movement is performed while the 
axis that is specified by PMC axis control is operating. In this case, it is 
necessary to add the following PMC ladder process.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
- When the axis specified by PMC axis control is operating, prohibit the 
backward movement of the axis specified by the program using reverse 
movement prohibition signal MRVM.
2 Alarm PS0130, “NC AND PMC AXIS ARE CONFLICTED” occurs when one of 
the following operations is executed.
(1) In the backward movement, when PMC axis control is specified for the axis 
specified by the program in the previous block.
(2) During PMC axis control, when a direction change is performed for the axis


key: chroma:document
string_value:
specified by the program in the previous block. 
3 In the skip (03h), continuous feed (06h), speed command (10h), torque control
(11h), and auxiliary function (12h,13h,14h) of PMC axis control, even if bit 1 
(HRB) of parameter No. 6403 is set to 1, the axis operates independently of 
handle operation.
WARNING
During the manual handle retrace, if a reset is made when a command by PMC 
axis control is not completed, the command by the program stops, but the


key: chroma:document
string_value:
command by PMC axis control continues. In this case, even if bit 1 (HRB) of 
parameter No. 6403 is set to 1, the command by PMC axis control operates 
independently of handle operation. Make a reset after confirming that the 
command by the PMC axis control is completed.
- Orientation of Cs contour control axis
- When the bit 2 (HRC) of parameter No.6403 is set to 0 (Conventional specification)
(a) Backward movement cannot be performed in orientation movement by the first G00 command


key: chroma:document
string_value:
after the Cs contour control mode is turned on. Therefore, when the above G00 command is 
reached during backward movement, backward movement cannot be done any more.
(b) Backward movement can be performed in the reference point return command (G28) of the Cs 
contour control axis, but the processing proceeds to the previous block without performing 
orientation movement.
- When the bit 2 (HRC) of parameter No.6403 is set to 1 (Extensional specification)


key: chroma:document
string_value:
(a) Backward movement can be performed in the orientation operation by the G00 command, but 
the processing proceeds to the previous block without performing orientation movement as in 
G28 command.
(b) The reference point return command (G28) of the Cs contour control axis performs the same 
movement as in the case where bit 2 (HRC) of parameter No. 6403 is 0.
WARNING
The workpiece cannot be actually machined because the orientation movement


key: chroma:document
string_value:
5. TEST OPERATION OPERATION B-64694EN/01
- 876 -
T
- Polygon machining with two spindles
- When the bit 3 (HRD) of parameter No.6403 is set to 0 (Conventional specification)
(a) Axes other than the polygonal synchronization axes operate at the speed according to handle 
operation even in the polygon machining mode. However, backward move cannot be 
performed in the block specified in the polygonal machining mode.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
(b) When the polygon machining block (G50.2) is reached in backward movement after the 
polygon machining is completed in forward movement, backward movement cannot be done 
any more.
- When the bit 3 (HRD) of parameter No.6403 is set to 1 (Extensional specification)
(a) It is possible to move backward or re-forward in the block specified in the polygonal machining
mode. When backward movement is performed during polygon machining, however, if the


key: chroma:document
string_value:
polygon machining-on block (G51.2) is reached, backward movement cannot be done any 
more.
(b) The operation when the polygon machining block (G50.2) is reached in backward movement 
after the polygon machining is completed in forward movement the same as in the case where 
bit 3 (HRD) of parameter No. 6403 is 0. 
WARNING
In the threading and polygon machining between two spindles, the spindle 
operates at a speed of override 100% instead of the speed according to handle


key: chroma:document
string_value:
operation. Therefore, the workpiece cannot be actually machined.
(Example) Treading during the manual handle retrace
- Balanced cutting
- When the bit 4 (HRE) of parameter No.6403 is set to 0 (Conventional specification)
(a) In the balance cutting mode, axes operate at the speed according to handle operation, but 
backward movement cannot be performed. 
(b) When the balance cutting block (G69) is reached in backward movement after the balance


key: chroma:document
string_value:
cutting is completed in forward movement, backward movement cannot be done any more.
- When the bit 4 (HRE) of parameter No.6403 is set to 1 (Extensional specification)
(a) It is possible to move backward or re-forward in the block specified in the balance cutting 
mode. When backward movement is performed in the balance cutting mode, if the balance 
cut-on block (G68) is reached, backward movement cannot be done any more.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
(b) The operation when the balance cutting block (G69) is reached in the backward movement after 
the balance cutting was completed in forward movement is the same operation as in the case 
where bit 4 (HRE) of parameter No. 6403 is 0. 
Tool (Handle operation)
Workpiece (Spindle override 100%)
The threads may be incorrectly cut in
manual handle operation
Workpiece (spindle override 100%)


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64694EN/01 OPERATION 5. TEST OPERATION
- 877 -
NOTE
1 In the balance cutting mode, waiting is done so that the block starts at the same 
time in each path. Backward movement cannot start during the waiting. After the 
waiting is completed and the next block starts, backward movement becomes 
possible.
2 In all paths that uses balance cutting, set bit 4 (HRE) of parameter No. 6403 to 1.
Path 1: Backward movement is disabled 
because waiting is under way.
Path 2: Backward 
movement is enabled.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
movement is enabled.
Path 2: Backward movement is enabled.
Path 1: Backward movement is enabled.
After waiting is completed


key: chroma:document
string_value:
6. SAFETY FUNCTIONS OPERATION B-64694EN/01
- 878 -
6 SAFETY FUNCTIONS
To immediately stop the machine for safety, press the Emergency stop button. To prevent the tool from 
exceeding the stroke ends, Overtravel check and Stored stroke check are available. This chapter describes 
emergency stop, overtravel check, and stored stroke check.
6.1 EMERGENCY STOP
If you press Emergency Stop button on the machine operator's panel, the machine movement stops in a 
moment. 
Fig. 6.1 Emergency stop


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Fig. 6.1 Emergency stop
This button is locked when it is pressed. Although it varies with the machine tool builder, the button can 
usually be unlocked by twisting it.
Explanation
EMERGENCY STOP interrupts the current to the motor. 
Causes of trouble must be removed before the button is released.
6.2 OVERTRAVEL
When the tool reaches the stroke end set by the machine tool limit switch, it decelerates and stops because 
of working the limit switch and an OVERTRAVEL alarm is displayed.
Deceleration


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64694EN/01 OPERATION 6. SAFETY FUNCTIONS
- 879 -
Explanation
- Overtravel during automatic operation
When the tool touches a limit switch along an axis during automatic operation, the tool is decelerated and 
stopped along all axes and an overtravel alarm is displayed.
- Overtravel during manual operation
In manual operation, the tool is decelerated and stopped only along the axis for which the tool has 
touched a limit switch. The tool still moves along the other axes.
- Releasing overtravel


key: chroma:document
string_value:
- Releasing overtravel
Press the reset button to reset the alarm after moving the tool to the safety direction by manual operation. 
For details on operation, refer to the operator's manual of the machine tool builder.
Alarm
Alarm No. Message Description
OT0506 + OVERTRAVEL 
( HARD )
The stroke limit switch in the positive direction was triggered.
This alarm is generated when the machine reaches the stroke end.
When this alarm is not generated, feed of all axes is stopped during


key: chroma:document
string_value:
automatic operation. During manual operation, only the feed of the axis 
on which the alarm occurred is stopped.
OT0507 - OVERTRAVEL ( HARD )
The stroke limit switch in the negative direction was triggered.
This alarm is generated when the machine reaches the stroke end.
When this alarm is not generated, feed of all axes is stopped during 
automatic operation. During manual operation, only the feed of the axis 
on which the alarm occurred is stopped.
6.3 STORED STROKE CHECK


key: chroma:document
string_value:
6.3 STORED STROKE CHECK
Three areas which the tool cannot enter can be specified with stored stroke check 1, stored stroke check 2, 
and stored stroke check 3.
Fig. 6.3 (a) Stroke check 
The following shows the areas which the tool cannot enter for each stored stroke check.
- Stored stroke check 1: Outside
- Stored stroke check 2: Outside or inside (switchable)
- Stored stroke check 3: Inside


key: chroma:document
string_value:
6. SAFETY FUNCTIONS OPERATION B-64694EN/01
- 880 -
When the tool moves into the forbidden area, an alarm is displayed and the tool is decelerated and 
stopped.
When the tool enters a forbidden area and an alarm is generated, the tool can be moved in the reverse 
direction from which the tool came.
Explanation
- Stored stroke check 1
Parameters (Nos. 1320, 1321 or Nos. 1326, 1327) set boundary. Outside the area of the set limits is a


key: chroma:document
string_value:
forbidden area. The machine tool builder usually sets this area as the maximum stroke.
When the tool enters a forbidden area and an alarm is generated, the tool can be moved in the reverse 
direction from which the tool came.
At this time, a signal (overtravel alarm signal) can be output to the PMC if bit 6 (OTS) of parameter No. 
1301 is set to 1. In addition, when the tool enters the forbidden area during manual operation, the signal


key: chroma:document
string_value:
(overtravel alarm signal) can be output to the PMC without generating the alarm by setting bit 1 (NAL) of 
parameter No. 1300 to 1. With this parameter setting, the alarm is generated when the tool enters the 
forbidden area during automatic operation.
CAUTION
1 If the two points for specifying a forbidden area are identical, all areas are 
handled as forbidden areas for stored stroke check 1.
2 The size of a forbidden area must be set carefully. If the size is set incorrectly,


key: chroma:document
string_value:
the stroke becomes infinite.
NOTE
1 Bit 7 (BFA) of parameter No. 1300 can be used to specify whether to stop the 
tool before it enters the forbidden area or when it enters the area.
2 The forbidden area must be specified with correct positional relationships. An 
incorrect area setting results in stroke infinity.
- Stored stroke check 1 area expansion
Stored stroke check 1 area expansion enables definition of eight areas using parameters Nos. 1320, 1321,


key: chroma:document
string_value:
1326, 1327, 1350 to 1361. Stored stroke check 1 area expansion is an optional function.
NOTE
The basic notes are the same as those of stored stroke check 1. 
- Stored stroke check 2
Parameters Nos. 1322, 1323 or commands set these boundaries. Inside or outside the area of the limit can 
be set as the forbidden area. Bit 0 (OUT) of parameter No. 1300 selects either inside or outside as the 
forbidden area.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
forbidden area. 
In case of program command a G22 command forbids the tool to enter the forbidden area, and a G23 
command permits the tool to enter the forbidden area. 
Each of G22; and G23; should be commanded independently of another commands in a block.
The command in the Fig. 6.3 (b) creates or changes the forbidden area:
(I, J, K)
(X, Y, Z)
X>I, Y>J, Z>K
G 22X_Y_Z_I_J_K_;
Fig. 6.3 (b) Creating or changing the forbidden area using a program


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64694EN/01 OPERATION 6. SAFETY FUNCTIONS
- 881 -
When setting the area by parameters, points A (Parameter No.1322) and B (Parameter No.1323) in the 
Fig. 6.3 (c) must be set.
X1>X2, Y1>Y2, Z1>Z2
A(X1, Y1, Z1)
B(X2, Y2, Z2)
Fig. 6.3 (c) Creating or changing the forbidden area using a parameters
The values X1, Y1, Z1, X2, Y2, and Z2, which are set by parameters Nos. 1322 and 1323, must be 
specified by the distance from the machine coordinate system (machine unit). The values X, Y, Z, I, J,


key: chroma:document
string_value:
and K, which are set by a G22 command, must be specified by the distance in the least input increment 
(input unit).
When data is set by the program command, the command valued is converted in the machine increment 
and it set to the corresponding parameter (No.1322 and No.1323).
- Format
Stored stroke check 2 on
 G22 X Y Z I J K ;
X, Y, Z:Coordinate of stored stroke check 2 in the positive direction on each axis
I, J, K: Coordinate of stored stroke check 2 in the negative direction on each axis


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Use addresses X, Y, and Z or addresses I, J, and K. Addresses X and I specify the 
forbidden area related to the X-axis of the basic three axes. Addresses Y and J specify 
the forbidden area related to the Y-axis of the basic three axes. Addresses Z and K 
specify the forbidden area related to the Z-axis of the basic three axes. When addresses 
are omitted, a stroke check is made based on the values set by parameters.
Stored stroke check 2 off
 G23 ;
- Stored stroke check 3


key: chroma:document
string_value:
- Stored stroke check 3
Set the boundary with parameters Nos. 1324 and 1325. The area inside the boundary becomes the 
forbidden area. The values X1, Y1, Z1, X2, Y2, and Z2 must be set as coordinates (machine unit) in the 
machine coordinate system.
CAUTION
1 If the two points for specifying a forbidden area are identical, all areas are 
handled as movable areas in case of stored stroke check 2 that the inside area 
is forbidden (bit 0 (OUT) of parameter No. 1300 = 0), or stored stroke check 3.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
And all areas except the specified point are handled as forbidden areas in case 
of stored stroke check 2 that the outside area is forbidden (the parameter OUT = 
1).
2 Even if the two points for specifying a forbidden area are erroneously set, the 
rectangular parallelepiped having the points as vertices is assumed as a 
boundary.
3 Since an axis without the reference position return function has no forbidden 
areas, there are no alarms about forbidden areas for the axis.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
6. SAFETY FUNCTIONS OPERATION B-64694EN/01
- 882 -
- Checkpoints in the forbidden area
The parameter setting or programmed value (XYZIJK) depends on which part of the tool or tool holder is 
checked for entering the forbidden area.
If point A (the top of the tool) is checked in Fig.6.3 (d) and Fig. 6.3 (e), the machine coordinates value 
that corresponds to distance "a" should be set as the data for the stored stroke limit function. If point B


key: chroma:document
string_value:
(the tool chuck) is checked, the machine coordinates value that corresponds to distance "b" must be set. 
When checking the tool tip (like point A), and if the tool length varies for each tool, setting the forbidden 
area for the longest tool requires no re-setting and results in safe operation.
- For machining center system
a
b
The position of the 
tool after reference
position return
Forbitten area boundary
A
B
Fig.6.3 (d) Setting the forbidden area
- For lathe system
The position of the


key: chroma:document
string_value:
The position of the 
tool after reference 
Forbitten area boundary position return
b
a
B
A
Fig. 6.3 (e) Setting the forbidden area
- Forbidden area overlapping 
Area can be set in piles.
Fig. 6.3 (f) Setting the forbidden area overlapping
Unnecessary limits should be set beyond the machine stroke.
- Condition under which each check is enabled 
Each check becomes effective after the power is turned on and manual reference position return or


key: chroma:document
string_value:
automatic reference position return by G28 has been performed. (In case not using absolute pulse coder)
After the power is turned on, if the reference position is in the forbidden area of each limit, an alarm is 
generated immediately. (Only in G22 mode for stored stroke check 2).


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64694EN/01 OPERATION 6. SAFETY FUNCTIONS
- 883 -
- Releasing the alarms
If the enters a forbidden area and an alarm is generated, the tool can be moved only in the backward 
direction. To cancel the alarm, move the tool backward until it is outside the forbidden area and reset the 
system. When the alarm is canceled, the tool can be moved both backward and forward.
- Change from G23 to G22 in a forbidden area
When G23 is switched to G22 in the forbidden area, the following results.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
<1> When the forbidden area is inside, an alarm is informed in the next move.
<2> When the forbidden area is outside, an alarm is informed immediately. 
- Timing for displaying an alarm
In stored stroke check 1/2/3, parameter BFA (bit 7 of No. 1300) selects whether an alarm is displayed 
immediately before the tool enters the forbidden area or immediately after the tool has entered the 
forbidden area.
NOTE
1 Because checking is made with higher precision than the precision of indicated


key: chroma:document
string_value:
coordinates, an OT alarm may be issued even when coordinates on a boundary 
is indicated.
Alarm
Number Message Description
OT0500 + OVERTRAVEL (SOFT 1) A movement in the positive direction exceeded stored stroke check 1.
OT0501 - OVERTRAVEL (SOFT 1) A movement in the negative direction exceeded stored stroke check 1.
OT0502 + OVERTRAVEL (SOFT 2) A movement in the positive direction exceeded stored stroke check 2.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
OT0503 - OVERTRAVEL (SOFT 2) A movement in the negative direction exceeded stored stroke check 2.
OT0504 + OVERTRAVEL (SOFT 3) A movement in the positive direction exceeded stored stroke check 3.
OT0505 - OVERTRAVEL (SOFT 3) A movement in the negative direction exceeded stored stroke check 3.
6.4 STROKE LIMIT CHECK BEFORE MOVE
During automatic operation, before the movement specified by a given block is started, whether the tool


key: chroma:document
string_value:
enters the forbidden area defined by stored stroke check 1, 2, or 3 is checked by determining the position 
of the end point from the current position of the machine and a specified amount of travel. If the tool is 
found to enter the forbidden area defined by a stored stroke limit, the tool is stopped immediately upon 
the start of movement for that block, and an alarm is displayed.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
6. SAFETY FUNCTIONS OPERATION B-64694EN/01
- 884 -
CAUTION
Whether the coordinates of the end point, reached as a result of traversing the 
distance specified in each block, are in a forbidden area is checked. In this case, 
the path followed by a move command is not checked. However, if the tool 
enters the forbidden area defined by stored stroke check 1, 2, or 3, an alarm is 
issued. (See the examples below.)
Example 1)
The tool is stopped at point a according to stored stroke 
check 1 or 2.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
check 1 or 2.
Immediately upon movement commencing from the start 
point, the tool is stopped to enable a stroke limit check 
before moving to be performed before movement.
Forbidden area defined by stored stroke 
check 1 or 2
Start point
a
Forbidden area defined by stored stroke 
check 1 or 2
End point
End point
Example 2)
End 
point
End point
Start point
Immediately upon movement commencing from the start 
point, the tool is stopped to enable a stroke limit check


key: chroma:document
string_value:
before moving to be performed before movement.
The tool is stopped at point a according to stored 
stroke check 2 or 3.
Forbidden area defined by stored stroke 
check 2 or 3
Forbidden area defined by stored stroke 
check 2 or 3
a


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64694EN/01 OPERATION 6. SAFETY FUNCTIONS
- 885 -
Explanation
This function is enabled by setting bit 7 (PLC) of parameter No. 1301 to 1.
When a stroke limit check before moving is performed, whether to check the movement performed by a 
G31 (skip) block and G37 (automatic tool length measurement) block can be determined using (bit 2 
(NPC) of parameter No. 1301).
Limitation
- Machine lock
If machine lock is applied at the start of movement, no stroke limit check made before movement is


key: chroma:document
string_value:
performed.
- G23
When stored stroke check 2 is disabled (G23 mode), no check is made to determine whether the tool 
enters the forbidden area defined by stored stroke check 2.
- Program restart
When a program is restarted, an alarm is issued if the restart position is within a forbidden area.
- A block consisting of multiple operations
If a block consisting of multiple operations (such as a canned cycle) is executed, an alarm is issued at the


key: chroma:document
string_value:
start point of any operation whose end point falls within an inhibited area.
- Cylindrical interpolation mode
In cylindrical interpolation mode, no check is made.
T
- Polar coordinate interpolation mode
In polar coordinate interpolation mode, no check is made.
- 3-dimensional coordinate system conversion
In 3-dimensional coordinate system conversion mode, no check is made.
- PMC axis control
No check is made for a movement based on PMC axis control.
Alarm
Number Message Description


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Number Message Description
OT0510 + OVERTRAVEL ( PRE-CHECK )
The block end point was found in the + side stroke limit 
prohibition area during a stroke check before movement.
Modify the program.
OT0511 - OVERTRAVEL ( PRE-CHECK )
The block end point was found in the - side stroke limit 
prohibition area during a stroke check before movement.
Modify the program.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
6. SAFETY FUNCTIONS OPERATION B-64694EN/01
- 886 -
6.4.1 Check of the Tool Path between Blocks by Stroke Limit 
Check before Move
Overview
Check of the tool path between blocks by Stroke limit check before move can be used.
Specification
By setting bit 0 (SBA) of parameter No.1302 to 1, whether the tool enters the forbidden area defined by 
Stored stroke limit 1, 2, or 3 is checked on the tool path of movement command in addition to checking


key: chroma:document
string_value:
the end point. (Hereinafter, this check is called “check of the tool path between blocks”.)
Check of the tool path between blocks is effective in Positioning (G00), Liner interpolation (G01), 
Circular interpolation (G02, G03), High-speed reference position return (G28, G30), or Selecting a 
machine coordinate system (G53).
If the tool enters the forbidden area defined by stored stroke check 1, 2, or 3, an alarm is issued when 
check of the tool path between blocks is not effective.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Fig. 6.4.1 (a) Check of the tool path between blocks 
Explanation
Plane selection axes
When one axis or both axes among the selection axes of selected plane (G17, G18 or G19 plane) not exist 
(Hereinafter, this selection axes are called “plane selection axes”.), check of the tool path between blocks
is not executed.
Target axis of check of the tool path between blocks
Check of the tool path between blocks is executed on the 3-dimension which is composed by the two axes


key: chroma:document
string_value:
of plane selection axes and the one axis other than plane selection axes (Hereinafter, this axis is called 
“plane non-selection axis”).
When forbidden area is outside. When forbidden area is inside. 
: Forbidden area
Forbidden area defined by 
stored stroke check 1 or 2
Forbidden area defined by 
stored stroke check 2 or 3
Start point
Start point End point
End 
point
Immediately upon movement commencing from the start point, the tool is stopped to


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64694EN/01 OPERATION 6. SAFETY FUNCTIONS
- 887 -
Fig. 6.4.1 (b) Target axis of check of the tool path between blocks 
Normally, the basic axis other than plane selection axes in basic coordinate system is set to plane 
non-selection axis.
Example 1)
When X-Y plane (G17) is selected with the 
following axis configuration, plane selection
axes are X axis and Y axis, and plane 
non-selection axis is Z axis. (Fig. 6.4.1 (c))
No.1022
(X)=1: X axis of the basic three axes


key: chroma:document
string_value:
(Y)=2: Y axis of the basic three axes
(Z)=3: Z axis of the basic three axes
(W)=7: Axis parallel to Z axis
(A)=0: Rotary axis
However, there are the following exceptions.
(1) The basic axis other than plane selection axes in basic coordinate system 
does not exist.
(1) - 1 When parallel axis does not exist.
In this case, check of the tool path between blocks is executed on the plane composed by plane 
selection axes.
Example 2)
When X-Y plane (G17) is selected with


key: chroma:document
string_value:
the following axis configuration, plane 
selection axes are X axis and Y axis, 
and plane non-selection axis does not 
exist. (Fig. 6.4.1 (d))
No.1022
(X)=1: X axis of the basic three axes
(Y)=2: Y axis of the basic three axes
(A)=0: Rotary axis
: Forbidden area
Plane selection axis
Plane selection axis
Plane non-selection
axis
Plane selection axis
Plane selection axis
Plane non-selection
axis
When forbidden area is outside. When forbidden area is inside.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Fig. 6.4.1 (c) Target axis in Example 1
Z axis
Y axis X axis
When forbidden area 
is outside. 
When forbidden area 
is inside. 
Z axis
Y axis X axis
Fig. 6.4.1 (d) Target axis in Example 2
Y axis
X axis
Y axis
X axis
When forbidden area 
is outside. 
When forbidden area 
is inside.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
6. SAFETY FUNCTIONS OPERATION B-64694EN/01
- 888 -
(1) - 2 When the parallel axis exists.
In this case, the parallel axis of lowest number of intra-path relative axis number which is parallel to 
the basic axis other than plane selection axes is set to plane non-selection axis.
Example 3)
When X-Y plane (G17) is selected with 
the following axis configuration, plane 
selection axes are X axis and Y axis, 
and plane non-selection axis is W axis.
(Fig. 6.4.1 (e))
No.1022


key: chroma:document
string_value:
(Fig. 6.4.1 (e))
No.1022
(X)=1: X axis of the basic three axes
(Y)=2: Y axis of the basic three axes
(W)=7: Axis parallel to Z axis
(A)=0: Rotary axis
(2) In the state of selecting the plane which includes the plane non-selection
axis direction, the axis movement had been specified.
In this case, the axis which was specified by the plane selection is set to plane non-selection axis.
However, when the axis movement by "List of modes that cannot execute check of the tool path


key: chroma:document
string_value:
between blocks" or "List of commands that cannot execute check of the tool path between blocks" is 
specified, the axis which was specified by the plane selection is not set to plane non-selection axis. And, 
the basic axis other than plane selection axes in the basic coordination system is set to plane 
non-selection axis when G code group of plane selection G code clear by reset etc. (Example 4)
Example 4)
When U-Y plane (G17) is selected after 
specifying the axis movement in W-X plane


key: chroma:document
string_value:
(G18) with the following axis configuration
(Program example 1), plane selection axes 
are U axis and Y axis, and plane 
non-selection axis is W axis. (Fig. 6.4.1 (f))
No.1022
(X)=1: X axis of the basic three axes
(Y)=2: Y axis of the basic three axes
(Z)=3: Z axis of the basic three axes
(U)=5: Axis parallel to X axis
(W)=7: Axis parallel to Z axis
(A)=0: Rotary axis
Fig. 6.4.1 (f) Target axis in Example 4 (U-Y-W) 
When forbidden area 
is outside. 
When forbidden area 
is inside. 
W axis


key: chroma:document
string_value:
is inside. 
W axis
Y axis
U axis
W axis
Y axis
U axis
Fig. 6.4.1 (e) Target axis in Example 3 
W axis
Y axis
X axis
W axis
Y axis
X axis
When forbidden area 
is outside. 
When forbidden area 
is inside.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64694EN/01 OPERATION 6. SAFETY FUNCTIONS
- 889 -
However, plane non-selection axis is 
Z axis in the following case. (Fig. 6.4.1 (g))
1. After selecting W-X plane (G18), 
U-Y plane (G17) is selected without 
specifying the axis movement
(Program example 2).
2. After selecting W-X plane (G18), 
U-Y plane (G17) is selected after 
specifying only the axis movement by 
"List of modes that cannot execute 
check of the tool path between blocks" or 
"List of commands that cannot execute


key: chroma:document
string_value:
check of the tool path between blocks"
(Program example 3).
Afterwards, when G code group of plane 
selection G code clears by reset etc., 
plane selection axes are X axis and 
Y axis, and plane non-selection axis is 
Z axis. (Fig. 6.4.1 (h))
When G code group of plane 
selection G code clears by reset 
etc..
Fig. 6.4.1 (h) Target axis in Example 4 (Clear state) 
Z axis
Y axis X axis
Z axis
Y axis X axis
When forbidden area 
is outside. 
When forbidden area 
is inside.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
is inside. 
Fig. 6.4.1 (g) Target axis in Example 4 (U-Y-Z) 
When forbidden area 
is outside. 
When forbidden area 
is inside. 
Z axis
Y axis U axis
Z axis
Y axis U axis
<Program example 1>
O0001
G18W0X0
G01W10.0X10.0F1000.0
:
G17U0Y0
:
:
<Program example 2>
O0001
G18W0X0
:
:
G17U0Y0
:
:
<Program example 3>
O0001
G18W0X0
G31W100.0F100.0
G31X100.0F100.0
G17U0Y0
:
:
When axis movement of W axis is specified,
When axis movement of W axis is not specified,


key: chroma:document
string_value:
plane selection axes are U axis and Y axis, and plane 
non-selection axis is W axis.
plane selection axes are U axis and Y axis, and plane 
non-selection axis is Z axis.
plane selection axes are U axis and Y axis, and plane 
non-selection axis is Z axis.
When axis movement of W axis is specified by G31 command
in case of setting bit 2 (NPC) of parameter No.1301 to 1 or 
etc. ,


key: chroma:document
string_value:
6. SAFETY FUNCTIONS OPERATION B-64694EN/01
- 890 -
NOTE
1 Check of the tool path between blocks is executed for forbidden area defined by 
stored stroke limit of plane selection axes and plane non-selection axis. 
Therefore, even if the axis other than plane selection axes and plane 
non-selection axis exceed the forbidden area defined by stored stroke limit in the 
tool path between blocks, the alarm is not generated by check of the tool path


key: chroma:document
string_value:
between blocks. (However, because stored stroke check of normal is effective, 
the alarm is generated when approaching the forbidden area defined by stored 
stroke limit during moving the axis.)
2 When the forbidden area is defined by inside of stored stroke limit, the alarm is 
generated if all axes to which stored stroke check is effective enter the forbidden 
area. However, in check of the tool path between blocks, the alarm is generated


key: chroma:document
string_value:
if plane selection axes and plane non-selection axis enters the forbidden area.
Limitation
Limitation of Stroke limit check before move
Limitation of Stroke limit check before move is effective for check of the tool path between blocks.
Non-linear type positioning
Check of the tool path between blocks is executed for the straight-line that connect the start position and 
end position of the block even if Positioning (G00), High-speed reference position return (G28, G30), or


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Selecting a machine coordinate system (G53) is move by non-linear type. Therefore, check of the tool 
path between blocks might not be able to be executed correctly, depending on the command.
Circular interpolation that is imperfect circle
When Circular interpolation that is imperfect circle is specified, check of the tool path between blocks is 
executed for the base circle. Therefore, check of the tool path between blocks might not be able to be


key: chroma:document
string_value:
executed correctly, depending on the shape of Circular interpolation.
Machine lock
For the axis which is Machine lock state when starting the block, check of the tool path between blocks is 
not executed.
Stored stroke check 2 off (G23)
When Stored stroke check 2 is invalid (G23 mode), check of the tool path between blocks for the 
forbidden area defined by Stored stroke limit 2 is not executed.
Arbitrary angular axis control


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Arbitrary angular axis control
Stored stroke limit can be checked in Cartesian coordinate system by setting bit 0 (AOT), bit 1 (AO2) or 
bit 2 (AO3) of parameter No.8201 in Arbitrary angular axis control. By setting of checking stored stroke 
limit in Cartesian coordinate system, check of the tool path between blocks is effective. Check of the tool 
path between blocks by this stored stroke limit is not executed if angular axis or perpendicular axis to


key: chroma:document
string_value:
which stored stroke limit is checked by slanted coordinate system is set to plane selection axes or plane 
non-selection axis.
List of modes that cannot execute check of the tool path between blocks
Check of the tool path between blocks is not executed during the mode of following functions.
- Polar coordinate interpolation
- Cylindrical interpolation
- 3-dimensional coordinate conversion
- Skip function (However, the case of setting bit 2 (NPC) of parameter No.1301 to 0 is excluded.)


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64694EN/01 OPERATION 6. SAFETY FUNCTIONS
- 891 -
- Automatic tool length measurement (M series) / automatic tool offset (T series) (However, the case 
of setting bit 2 (NPC) of parameter No.1301 to 0 is excluded.)
List of commands that cannot execute check of the tool path between blocks
Check of the tool path between blocks is not executed by the following commands.
- Movement command by Real time macro commands
- Movement command by PMC axis control


key: chroma:document
string_value:
- Movement command for slave axis of Tandem control
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1302 SBA
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Bit path
#0 SBA In Stroke limit check before move, check of the tool path between blocks for movement 
command is, :
0: Not executed.
1: Executed.
NOTE
1 Check of the tool path between blocks is invalid for the functions to 
which Stroke limit check before move is invalid.
2 Limitation of Stroke limit check before move is valid for check of the


key: chroma:document
string_value:
tool path between blocks.
Alarm and message
Number Message Description
OT0510 + OVERTRAVEL ( PRE-CHECK ) The block end point or the tool path between blocks was found 
in the + side stroke limit forbidden area during Stroke limit 
check before move.
Modify the program.
OT0511 - OVERTRAVEL ( PRE-CHECK ) The block end point or the tool path between blocks was found 
in the - side stroke limit forbidden area during Stroke limit 
check before move.
Modify the program.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
6. SAFETY FUNCTIONS OPERATION B-64694EN/01
- 892 -
6.5 STROKE LIMIT AREA CHANGING FUNCTION
Overview
This function can be used to rewrite the parameters that set the + side coordinate value and the - side 
coordinate values of the stroke limits even when the axis is traveling. The new stroke limit range is 
enabled immediately after the parameters are rewritten. The rewritable parameters are shown below. 
- Parameter No. 1320


key: chroma:document
string_value:
- Parameter No. 1320
Coordinate value I of stored stroke check 1 in the positive direction on each axis
- Parameter No. 1321
Coordinate value I of stored stroke check 1 in the negative direction on each axis
- Parameter No. 1322
Coordinate value of stored stroke check 2 in the positive direction on each axis
- Parameter No. 1323
Coordinate value of stored stroke check 2 in the negative direction on each axis
- Parameter No. 1324


key: chroma:document
string_value:
- Parameter No. 1324
Coordinate value of stored stroke check 3 in the positive direction on each axis
- Parameter No. 1325
Coordinate value of stored stroke check 3 in the negative direction on each axis
- Parameter No. 1326
Coordinate value II of stored stroke check 1 in the positive direction on each axis
- Parameter No. 1327
Coordinate value II of stored stroke check 1 in the negative direction on each axis


key: chroma:document
string_value:
The machining cycle time can be reduced because this function can rewrite parameters even if some axes 
are moving. 
This function is enabled by setting bit 0 (SLM) of parameter No.1312 to 1.
This function is optional.
Limitation
- Axis synchronous control
This function is disabled when the automatic slave axis parameter setting is enabled (bit 4 (SYP) of 
parameter No. 8303 = 1) in feed axis synchronous control. (Writing to the parameters is allowed only 
when all axes are stopped.)
Note
NOTE


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Note
NOTE
If the parameters are rewritten so that the current position is included in a 
forbidden area during axis movement, the axis decelerates and stops, and an 
alarm is displayed. If an alarm occurs when the tool enters a forbidden area, the 
tool can move only opposite to the direction from which the tool came. After 
moving it outside the forbidden area in the opposite direction, release the alarm 
with a reset. When the alarm is released, the tool can move in both directions.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64694EN/01 OPERATION 6. SAFETY FUNCTIONS
- 893 -
6.6 STORED STROKE LIMIT RANGE SWITCHING FUNCTION 
BY SIGNAL
Overview
The range stored stroke limit can be switched by input signal of PMC. Therefore, the range stored stroke 
limit can easily be set again.
Note
NOTE
1 Stroke limit check before move also becomes effective in the switched area.
2 The range of stored stroke limit returns to the state set to the parameter at power 
on.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
on.
3 Stored stroke check 1 area expansion (coordinate value III - VIII) cannot be 
rewritten by this function.
4 When the range of stored stroke limit is switched by this function, even if the 
parameters (No.1320-No.1327) are rewritten by the G10 instruction, the PMC 
window, and the G22 instruction, it is not effective immediately.
5 Stroke limit area changing function is a function to rewrite the parameter 
(No.1320-No.1327). This function is a function that switches the range of stroke


key: chroma:document
string_value:
limit to the value that is set to data table (D) of PMC without rewriting the 
parameter (No.1320-No.1327).
6.7 WRONG OPERATION PREVENTION FUNCTIONS
An improper tool offset setting or an improper operation of the machine can result in the workpiece being 
cut inadequately or the tool being damaged. Also, if data is lost due to an operation mistake, it takes extra 
time to recover from the mistake.
The wrong operation prevention functions described below are meant to prevent the operator from


key: chroma:document
string_value:
performing any unintended operation (hereinafter referred to as an improper operation).
1 Functions that are used when data is set
- Data check to verify that the offset data is within the valid setting range
- Incremental input operation confirmation
- Prohibition of the absolute input by the soft key to prevent any improper absolute or 
incremental input operation
- Confirmation of any operation of deleting the program or all data
- Confirmation of a data update during the data setting process


key: chroma:document
string_value:
2 Functions that are used when the program is executed
- Highlighting of updated modal information
- Display of the executed block status prior to the program execution
- Display of the axis status, such as the mirror image function enabled or the interlock function 
enabled
- Check for starting from the middle of the program
- Data check to verify that the offset data is within the effective setting range
- Maximum incremental value check


key: chroma:document
string_value:
6. SAFETY FUNCTIONS OPERATION B-64694EN/01
- 894 -
6.7.1 Functions that are Used When Data is Set
The following functions are provided to prevent improper operations when data is set.
- Input data range check
- Confirmation of incremental input
- Prohibition of the absolute input by the soft key
- Confirmation of the deletion of the program
- Confirmation of the deletion of all data
- Confirmation of a data update during the data setting process


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Set these functions on the operation confirmation function setting screen. For the input data range check, 
set a valid input data range, e.g. the upper and lower limits, for each input screen. For the other functions, 
specify whether to enable or disable them.
For information about how to display the individual setting screens, how to manipulate them, and other 
details, see the item “Operation confirmation setting screen” that describes the operation procedures.
6.7.1.1 Input data range check


key: chroma:document
string_value:
6.7.1.1 Input data range check
This function allows an effective data range to be set and checks whether the input data is within the set 
range.
Input data range check
Explanation
- Outline of the input data range check
This function allows an effective data range to be set for the data of each input screen listed later and 
checks whether the input data is within the set range. If the input data is out of the effective data range,


key: chroma:document
string_value:
the warning message "DATA IS OUT OF RANGE" is displayed and the data is rejected.
For example, assume that the effective data range for a certain tool offset number is set to -200. to 200, 
and that you are going to input 100.[INPUT]. Even if you inadvertently press the 0 key one more time, 
resulting in 1000.[INPUT], the input of 1000. is not accepted.
The function detects a setting mistake and prevents the program from running with invalid data.
- Input screens for which this function is effective


key: chroma:document
string_value:
- Tool compensation
- Workpiece origin offset
T
- Y-axis tool offset
- Workpiece shift
- Settings
To enable this function, set an effective data range for each input screen on the operation confirmation 
function setting screen. For information about how to display the individual setting screens, how to set 
data ranges, and other details, see the items that describe the setting of the data ranges.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
If the set data range is invalid, no data input is accepted. Correct the data range setting, and then input 
data.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64694EN/01 OPERATION 6. SAFETY FUNCTIONS
- 895 -
- Disabling the function
The input data range check is disabled if you make any of the following settings on the operation 
confirmation function setting screen.
- Both the upper and lower limit values for the tool offset number or workpiece coordinate system are 
0.
- The upper and lower limit values for each offset are identical.
- Messages displayed during the input data range check


key: chroma:document
string_value:
When the cursor moves into an input field of an input screen, one of the messages and warning messages 
in the Table 6.7.1.1 (a) or Table 6.7.1.1 (b) is displayed. No message is displayed when the input data 
range check is disabled.
When the set effective data range is valid
Table 6.7.1.1 (a) List of messages displayed 1
Input data status Message Color
The data in the input field is within the range. Input range xxx - xxx Black


key: chroma:document
string_value:
The data in the input field is out of the range. Input range xxx - xxx Red
xxx: Upper and lower limit values
When the set effective data range is invalid
Table 6.7.1.1 (b) List of messages displayed 2
Range check status Message Color
Tool offset number overlap NG SETTING (OFFSET NUM OVERLAP) Red
Workpiece coordinate system overlap NG SETTING (WORK COORD VAL OVERLAP) Red
Invalid upper and lower limit values NG SETTING (U-LMT AND L-LMT ILLEGAL) Red


key: chroma:document
string_value:
The message "NG SETTING (U-LMT AND L-LMT ILLEGAL)" is displayed in the following cases:
- The upper and lower limit values are reversed.
- The values are not effective (e.g., more pairs of offset numbers than allowed are set).
- Either of the tool offset numbers is 0.
- Range check for data changed by G10 or system variable
If the data changed by G10 or system variable is out of the effective data range, the alarm PS0334 
"OFFSET DATA OUT OF RANGE" is displayed.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
6.7.1.2 Confirmation of incremental input
This function displays a confirmation message when you attempt to input an incremental value by using 
the [+INPUT] soft key.
Confirmation of incremental input
Explanation
- Outline of the confirmation of incremental input
This function displays a confirmation message when you attempt to input an incremental value by using 
the [+INPUT] soft key in any of the input screens listed below. It lets you confirm whether you really


key: chroma:document
string_value:
want to change data or not before making that change.
For example, when you set 5.[+INPUT] for 10., the message "15. INPUT OK?" is displayed.
The function prevents improper absolute or incremental input operations.
NOTE
This function cannot be used to input two or more values consecutively by 
delimiting them by semicolons (;).


key: chroma:document
string_value:
6. SAFETY FUNCTIONS OPERATION B-64694EN/01
- 896 -
- Input screens for which this function is effective
- Tool compensation
- Workpiece origin offset
- Settings
- Parameter
- Pitch error compensation
T
- Workpiece shift
- Y-axis tool offset
- Second tool geometry offset
- Chuck tail stock barrier
- Tool geometry data
- Settings
In the operation confirmation function setting screen, check or uncheck the "INCREMENTAL INPUT"


key: chroma:document
string_value:
box to enable or disable this function. For information about how to display the setting screen, how to set 
the function, and other details, see the item “Operation confirmation setting” that describes the setting of 
the operation confirmation function.
6.7.1.3 Prohibition of the absolute input by the soft key
This function prohibits the absolute input using the [INPUT] soft key.
Prohibition of the absolute input by the soft key
Explanation


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Explanation
- Outline of the prohibition of the absolute input by the soft key
This function prohibits the absolute input by the [INPUT] soft key in the input screens listed later.
It prevents improper absolute or incremental input operations by requiring that the absolute input be made 
using the MDI key and that the incremental input be made using the [+INPUT] soft key.
- Input screens for which this function is effective
- Tool compensation
- Workpiece origin offset
T
- Y-axis tool offset


key: chroma:document
string_value:
T
- Y-axis tool offset
- Workpiece shift
- Settings
In the operation confirmation function setting screen, check or uncheck the "DISABLED 
SOFTKEY[INPUT] IN" box to enable or disable this function. For information about how to display the 
setting screen, how to set the function, and other details, see the item “Operation confirmation setting” 
that describes the setting of the operation confirmation function.
6.7.1.4 Confirmation of the deletion of the program


key: chroma:document
string_value:
This function displays the confirmation message "DELETE PROGRAM ?" when you attempt to delete 
the program.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64694EN/01 OPERATION 6. SAFETY FUNCTIONS
- 897 -
Confirmation of the deletion of the program
Explanation
- Outline of the confirmation of the deletion of the program
When you attempt to delete the program, this function displays the confirmation message "DELETE 
PROGRAM ?" It lets you confirm whether you really want to delete the program or not before executing 
the deletion.
The function prevents the program from being deleted due to an improper operation.
- Settings


key: chroma:document
string_value:
- Settings
In the operation confirmation function setting screen, check or uncheck the "PROGRAM DELETE" box 
to enable or disable this function. For information about how to display the setting screen, how to set the 
function, and other details, see the item “Operation confirmation setting” that describes the setting of the 
operation confirmation function.
6.7.1.5 Confirmation of the deletion of all data


key: chroma:document
string_value:
This function displays the confirmation message "DELETE ALL DATA?" when you attempt to delete all 
data.
Confirmation of the deletion of all data
Explanation
- Outline of the confirmation of the deletion of all data
When you attempt to delete all data on the input screen described later, this function displays the 
confirmation message "DELETE ALL DATA?". It lets you confirm whether you really want to delete all 
data or not before executing the deletion.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
The function prevents all data from being deleted due to an improper operation.
- Input screens for which this function is effective
- Tool compensation
T
- Y-axis tool offset
- Settings
In the operation confirmation function setting screen, check or uncheck the "ALL DATA DELETE" box 
to enable or disable this function. For information about how to display the setting screen, how to set the


key: chroma:document
string_value:
function, and other details, see the item “Operation confirmation setting” that describes the setting of the 
operation confirmation function.
6.7.1.6 Confirmation of a data update during the data setting process
This function displays the [CAN] and [EXEC] soft keys for confirmation when you attempt to update the 
data of an input screen during the data setting process.
Confirmation of a data update during the data setting process
Explanation


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Explanation
- Outline of the confirmation of a data update during the data setting process
When you input data in input screen during the data setting process, this function displays the [CAN] and 
[EXEC] soft keys for confirmation. It lets you confirm whether you really want to update the data or not 
before executing the update.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
6. SAFETY FUNCTIONS OPERATION B-64694EN/01
- 898 -
The function prevents set values from being lost due to an improper operation.
If you input data using the [+INPUT] soft key when the confirmation of incremental input is enabled, a 
message is displayed to confirm the incremental input.
- Settings
In the operation confirmation function setting screen, check or uncheck the "INPUT IN SETTING" box


key: chroma:document
string_value:
to enable or disable this function. For information about how to display the setting screen, how to set the 
function, and other details, see the item “Operation confirmation setting” that describes the setting of the 
operation confirmation function.
6.7.2 Functions that are Used when the Program is Executed
Overview
The following functions are provided to prevent improper operations when the program is executed.
- Display of updated modal information
- Start check signal
- Axis status display


key: chroma:document
string_value:
- Axis status display
- Confirmation of the start from a middle block
- Data range check
- Maximum incremental value check
- Warning indication during a reset in program operation
In the operation confirmation function setting screen, specify whether to enable or disable these functions 
individually.
To disable or enable "Warning indication during a reset in program operation", set bit 1 (WMD) of
parameter No. 10334 instead of the wrong operation prevention function setting screen.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
For information about how to display the setting screen, how to manipulate it, and other details, see the 
item “Operation confirmation setting screen” that describes the operation procedures.
6.7.2.1 Display of updated modal information
This function allows modal information updated by the NC command or RESET to be highlighted in the 
modal information display for the current block.
Display of updated modal information
Explanation
- Outline of the display of updated modal information


key: chroma:document
string_value:
This function allows modal information updated by the NC command or RESET to be highlighted in the 
modal information display for the current block.
For example, when an absolute command has been changed to an incremental command or when the 
workpiece coordinate system has been initialized by RESET, the function displays the changed part of the 
data in an easy-to-recognize manner, in order to prevent improper operations during the execution of the 
program.
- Settings


key: chroma:document
string_value:
program.
- Settings
In the operation confirmation function setting screen, check or uncheck the "UPDATE MODAL 
HIGHLIGHT DISPLAY" box to enable or disable this function. For information about how to display the 
setting screen, how to set the function, and other details, see the item “Operation confirmation setting” 
that describes the setting of the operation confirmation function.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64694EN/01 OPERATION 6. SAFETY FUNCTIONS
- 899 -
6.7.2.2 Start check signal
This function displays the remaining amount of travel and modal information of the block to be executed 
and puts the program to a temporary halt before the program is executed.
Start check signal
Explanation
- Outline of the start check signal
When a cycle start is made with the start check signal STCHK <G0408.0> set to 1, the function displays


key: chroma:document
string_value:
the remaining amount of travel and modal information of the block to be executed and puts the program 
to a temporary halt. Making the cycle start again resumes the execution of the program.
The function lets you check the status of the block before executing it, thus helping to prevent improper 
operations at the time of execution.
Using this function in combination with the updated modal information display function described in the


key: chroma:document
string_value:
preceding subsection makes it easier to check the status of the block to be executed.
- Settings
This function does not require any setting on the operation confirmation function setting screen.
6.7.2.3 Axis status display
This function displays the axis status to the left of the axis name in the coordinate display screen.
Axis status display
Explanation
- Outline of the axis status display


key: chroma:document
string_value:
This function displays the axis status to the left of the axis name in the display of the machine coordinates, 
absolute coordinates, relative coordinates, and remaining travel amounts.
For example, when the mirror image function is enabled for the X1 axis, the absolute coordinates are 
displayed as follows.
ABSOLUTE
M X1 10.000
 Y1 10.000
 Z1 0.000
By displaying the axis status as shown above, the function prevents improper operations at the time of 
execution.
- Axis status indication


key: chroma:document
string_value:
- Axis status indication
The axis status is indicated as follows. These indications are listed in order of priority.
AXIS DETACH : D
FLEXIBLE PATH AXIS 
ASSIGNMENT : R
INTERLOCK : I
MACHINE LOCK : L
SERVO OFF : S
TORQUE CONTROL : T
AXIS MOVING : *
MIRROR IMAGE : M


key: chroma:document
string_value:
6. SAFETY FUNCTIONS OPERATION B-64694EN/01
- 900 -
- Settings
In the operation confirmation function setting screen, check or uncheck the "AXIS STATUS DISPLAY" 
box to enable or disable this function. For information about how to display the setting screen, how to set 
the function, and other details, see the item “Operation confirmation setting” that describes the setting of 
the operation confirmation function.
6.7.2.4 Confirmation of the start from a middle block


key: chroma:document
string_value:
This function displays a confirmation message when you attempt to execute a memory operation with the 
cursor placed on a block in the middle of the program.
Confirmation of the start from a middle block
Explanation
- Outline of the confirmation of the start from a middle block
This function displays the confirmation message "START FROM MIDDLE OF PROG 
(START/RESET)" when you attempt to execute a memory operation with the cursor placed on a block in


key: chroma:document
string_value:
the middle of the program. It lets you confirm whether you really want to start execution from that block 
or not before executing the program.
The function prevents you from inadvertently making a cycle start from a block in the middle of the 
program.
- Clearing confirmation message
When the confirmation message is displayed and the cycle start is performed again, the confirmation 
message disappears and the automatic operation is restarted. And, when the confirmation message is


key: chroma:document
string_value:
displayed and the reset is performed, the confirmation message disappears and the reset state is entered.
- Settings
In the operation confirmation function setting screen, check or uncheck the "START FROM MIDDLE 
OF PROGRAM" box to enable or disable this function. For information about how to display the setting 
screen, how to set the function, and other details, see the item “Operation confirmation setting” that 
describes the setting of the operation confirmation function.
- Multi-path system


key: chroma:document
string_value:
- Multi-path system
The operation of the reconfirmation of the start from a middle block in a multi-path system is determined 
with the setting of bit 0 (MSC) of parameter No. 10335.
For example, if a cycle start is executed on two paths simultaneously in the program below, the operation 
is as given in Table 6.7.2.4.
 Program for path 1 Program for path 2
Table 6.7.2.4 Operation in a multi-path system
Bit 0 (MSC) of parameter No. 10335 Memory operation Confirmation message Path 1 Path 2
0 0


key: chroma:document
string_value:
0 0
0 1 Starts on path 1 only. Displayed for both path.
1 0
1 1 Does not start on either path. Displayed for both path.
O1000 ; 
G90 G28 X100.Y100. ;
G91 G00 X50. ;
 :
 :
 :
 :
M02 
O1000 ; 
G90 G28 X100.Y100. ;
G91 G00 X50. ; 
 :
 :
 :
 :
M02 
Cursor


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64694EN/01 OPERATION 6. SAFETY FUNCTIONS
- 901 -
To reconfirm the start from a middle block between paths, set bit 0 (MSC) of parameter No. 10335 to 1 
for each path.
NOTE
If bit 0 (MSC) of parameter No. 10335 for each path is 1, a cursor position check 
is not performed on the path on which memory operation is in progress. For 
example, in the case below, if a cycle start is executed on path 1, a cursor 
position check is not performed on path 2.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Path 1: Reset state Path 2: Memory operation in progress
6.7.2.5 Data range check
This function lets you set an effective data range and check whether the data to be used for execution is 
within the set range.
Data range check
Explanation
- Outline of the data range check
This function lets you set an effective data range for each data item listed later and check whether the data 
to be used for execution is within the set range. If the data is out of the effective range, the alarm PS0334


key: chroma:document
string_value:
"OFFSET DATA OUT OF EFFECTIVE RANGE" is displayed.
The function detects data setting mistakes and prevents the program from running with invalid data.
- Data for which this function is effective
- Tool compensation
- Workpiece origin offset
T
- Y-axis tool offset
- Workpiece shift
NOTE
To use this function, you need to set each effective data range correctly. For 
information about how to set the data ranges, see the item “Effective value range 
for each data”.
O1000 ; 
G90 G28 X100.Y100. ;


key: chroma:document
string_value:
O1000 ; 
G90 G28 X100.Y100. ;
G91 G00 X50. ;
 :
 :
 :
 :
 :
M02 
O1000 ; 
G90 G28 X100.Y100. ;
G91 G00 X50. ; 
 :
 :
 :
 :
 :
M02 
Cursor


key: chroma:document
string_value:
6. SAFETY FUNCTIONS OPERATION B-64694EN/01
- 902 -
6.7.2.6 Maximum incremental value check
This function checks the maximum incremental value specified for each axis by the NC command.
Maximum incremental value check
Explanation
- Outline of the maximum incremental value check
When the maximum incremental value is specified by the NC command described later, make sure that 
the absolute value of the travel distance by the incremental command does not exceed the specified value.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
If the specified value is exceeded, the alarm PS0337 "EXCESS MAXIMUM INCREMENTAL VALUE" 
is displayed.
A maximum incremental value can be specified on a per-axis basis and remains effective until 0 is set or 
the value is reset.
For example, when AI contour control is used, the function checks whether the amount of movement 
between blocks is kept to the specified value or less. Through this process, it detects erroneous program 
settings and prevents the program from running with invalid data.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
- Format
The format of the NC command used to specify the maximum incremental value is as follows.
G91.1 IP_ ; 
IP_ ; Maximum incremental value
(To cancel the maximum incremental value check, set 0.)
6.7.2.7 Warning display during a reset in program operation
When bit 6 (CLR) of parameter No. 3402 is 0, if a reset occurs during block execution in program
operation, modal information returns to the state before block execution.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
This function display a warning to notify the operator that modal information is not updated by
information of the interrupted block.
Warning display during a reset in program operation
Explanation
- Overview of warning display during a reset in program operation
If a reset occurs during program operation, the warning "MODAL DATA IS CHANGED BY BLOCK 
STOP" is issued. To enable or disable the warning, set bit 1 (WMD) of parameter No. 10334.
- Warning occurrence condition


key: chroma:document
string_value:
- Warning occurrence condition
- When a reset occurs during program operation, if address G, F, H, D, T, S, M, or B (second auxiliary
function) was changed.
- Warning clear condition
- When a reset is issued
- When either of MDI or Soft keys is pushed


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64694EN/01 OPERATION 6. SAFETY FUNCTIONS
- 903 -
- Warning displaying screen
6.7.3 Setting Screen
Overview
This section describes how to display the operation confirmation function setting screen and how to set 
the individual data items on this screen.
The operation confirmation function setting screen allows you to set the following items:
- Enabling or disabling each operation confirmation function
- Effective value range for the tool offset


key: chroma:document
string_value:
- Effective value range for the workpiece origin offset
T
- Effective value range for the Y-axis tool offset
- Effective value range for the work shift
6.7.3.1 Operation confirmation function setting screen
This screen displays the enable/disable setting status of the following operation confirmation functions 
and lets you change their settings. (Hereinafter, the screen is referred to as the operation confirmation 
function setting screen.)
- Confirmation of incremental input


key: chroma:document
string_value:
- Prohibition of the absolute input by the soft key
- Confirmation of the deletion of the program
- Confirmation of the deletion of all data
- Confirmation of a data update during the data setting process
- Display of updated modal information
- Axis status display
- Confirmation of the start from a middle block


key: chroma:document
string_value:
6. SAFETY FUNCTIONS OPERATION B-64694EN/01
- 904 -
Displaying and setting the operation confirmation function setting screen
Procedure
1 Press the function key.
2 Press the continuous menu key at the right edge of the screen several times until the [GUARD] 
soft key is displayed.
3 Press the [GUARD] soft key. The setting screen that was displayed last with relation to any 
operation confirmation function is displayed (the operation confirmation function setting screen is


key: chroma:document
string_value:
the first such screen that appears after the system is restarted).
4 If any screen other than the operation confirmation function setting screen is displayed, press the 
[GUARD] soft key. The operation confirmation function setting screen is displayed.
Fig. 6.7.3.1 Operation confirmation function setting screen
5 Move the cursor to the check box of the item you want to change the setting, by pressing the , 
, , and keys.
6 Press the soft key [(OPRT)].


key: chroma:document
string_value:
6 Press the soft key [(OPRT)].
7 Press the soft key [ON:1] or [OFF:0]. When you press the [ON:1] soft key, a check mark (✓) 
appears in the corresponding check box, indicating that the function is enabled. When you press the 
[OFF:0] soft key, the check mark disappears from the check box, indicating that the function is 
disabled.
Explanation
- Items to be set
The Table 6.7.3.1 shows what is displayed for each item to be set and the corresponding functions. The


key: chroma:document
string_value:
items whose column of "Default" is marked by "○" is effective automatically after memory all clear.
Table 6.7.3.1
Displayed item Default Corresponding function
INCREMENTAL INPUT ○ Confirmation of incremental input
DISABLED SOFTKEY[INPUT] IN
 TOOL OFFSET, WORK SHIFT
Prohibition of the absolute input by the soft key (tool offset, Y-axis 
tool offset (lathe system), and work shift (lathe system))


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64694EN/01 OPERATION 6. SAFETY FUNCTIONS
- 905 -
Displayed item Default Corresponding function
DISABLED SOFTKEY[INPUT] IN
 WORK COORDINATES
Prohibition of the absolute input by the soft key (workpiece origin 
offset)
PROGRAM DELETE ○ Confirmation of the deletion of the program
ALL DATA DELETE ○ Confirmation of the deletion of all data
INPUT IN SETTING Confirmation of a data update during the data setting process
UPDATE MODAL HIGHLIGHT 
DISPLAY
○ Display of updated modal information


key: chroma:document
string_value:
AXIS STATUS DISPLAY ○ Axis status display
START FROM MIDDLE OF 
PROGRAM
○ Confirmation of the start from a middle block
6.7.3.2 Tool offset range setting screen
This screen displays the setting status of tool offset effective data ranges and lets you change their 
settings. (Hereinafter, the screen is referred to as the tool offset range setting screen.)
Up to 20 pairs of numbers can be specified to identify tool offset number ranges, and an effective offset


key: chroma:document
string_value:
value range can be defined for each of these 20 pairs.
Displaying and setting the tool offset range setting screen
Procedure
1 Press the function key.
2 Press the continuous menu key at the right edge of the screen several times until the [GUARD] 
soft key is displayed.
3 Press the [GUARD] soft key. The setting screen that was displayed last with relation to any 
operation confirmation function is displayed (the operation confirmation function setting screen is


key: chroma:document
string_value:
the first such screen that appears after the system is restarted).
4 If any screen other than the tool offset range setting screen is displayed, press the [OFFSET] soft key. 
The tool offset range setting screen is displayed. What is displayed in this screen differs depending 
on the system configuration described later.
Fig. 6.7.3.2 Tool offset range setting screen
5 Press the soft key [(OPRT)].


key: chroma:document
string_value:
6. SAFETY FUNCTIONS OPERATION B-64694EN/01
- 906 -
6 Move the cursor to the item you want to set, by using the and keys, , ,
, and keys, or the [SWITCH] soft key.
7 Press the MDI key, enter necessary data, and then press the [INPUT] soft key.
If the set effective data range is invalid for any of the reasons listed below, the input data range check is 
not performed normally and the input data is rejected.
- There is a tool offset number overlap.
- The upper and lower limit values are reversed.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
- The values are not effective (e.g., more pairs of offset numbers than allowed are set).
- Either of the tool offset numbers is 0.
Also, the input data range check is invalidated in the following cases.
- Both the upper and lower limit values for the tool offset number are 0.
- The upper and lower offset limit values are identical.
Explanation
- System configuration
What to set differs for each of the following system configurations:
M
- Tool offset memory A
- Tool offset memory C
T


key: chroma:document
string_value:
- Tool offset memory C
T
- Without geometry and wear offset
- With geometry and wear offset
- Tool offset for milling and turning function
M
- What to set with tool offset memory A
With tool offset memory A, an effective data range is specified using the four items in the Table 6.7.3.2
(a).
Table 6.7.3.2 (a)
Displayed item What to set
RANGE FROM Specify a tool offset number range. TO
- LOW-LIMIT Specify a valid tool offset value range in connection with a specified tool offset


key: chroma:document
string_value:
UP-LIMIT number range.
- What to set with tool offset memory C
With tool offset memory C, an effective data range is specified using the ten items in the Table 6.7.3.2
(b).
Table 6.7.3.2 (b)
Displayed item What to set
RANGE FROM Specify a tool offset number range. TO
GEOM
LENGTH LOW-LIMIT Specify a valid tool offset value range for geometry length in 
UP-LIMIT connection with a specified tool offset number range.
RADIUS LOW-LIMIT Specify a valid tool offset value range for geometry radius in


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64694EN/01 OPERATION 6. SAFETY FUNCTIONS
- 907 -
Displayed item What to set
WEAR
LENGTH LOW-LIMIT Specify a valid tool offset value range for wear length in connection 
UP-LIMIT with a specified tool offset number range.
RADIUS LOW-LIMIT Specify a valid tool offset value range for wear radius in connection 
UP-LIMIT with a specified tool offset number range.
In the case of this configuration, all the information needed to set an input data range cannot be displayed


key: chroma:document
string_value:
in a single screen page. Set the information while switching pages using the [SWITCH] soft key. The 
screen provides an indication that lets you know which part of the information is currently displayed.
T
- What to set without geometry/wear offset
Without geometry/wear offset, an effective data range is specified using the eight items in the Table 
6.7.3.2 (c).
Table 6.7.3.2 (c)
Displayed item What to set
RANGE FROM Specify a tool offset number range. TO


key: chroma:document
string_value:
X LOW-LIMIT Specify a valid tool offset value range for the X-axis in connection with a specified 
UP-LIMIT tool offset number range.
Z LOW-LIMIT Specify a valid tool offset value range for the Z-axis in connection with a specified 
UP-LIMIT tool offset number range.
RADIUS LOW-LIMIT Specify a valid tool offset value range for tool-nose radius in connection with a 
UP-LIMIT specified tool offset number range.
NOTE
The radius-related items are not displayed if the cutter or tool nose radius


key: chroma:document
string_value:
compensation is not used.
- What to set with geometry/wear offset
With geometry/wear offset, an effective data range is specified using the 14 items in the Table 6.7.3.2 (d).
Table 6.7.3.2 (d)
Displayed item What to set
RANGE FROM Specify a tool offset number range. TO
GEOM
X LOW-LIMIT Specify a valid tool offset value range for the geometry X-axis in 
UP-LIMIT connection with a specified tool offset number range.
Z LOW-LIMIT Specify a valid tool offset value range for the geometry Z-axis in


key: chroma:document
string_value:
UP-LIMIT connection with a specified tool offset number range.
RADIUS LOW-LIMIT Specify a valid tool offset value range for geometry tool-nose radius in 
UP-LIMIT connection with a specified tool offset number range.
WEAR
X LOW-LIMIT Specify a valid tool offset value range for the wear X-axis in connection 
UP-LIMIT with a specified tool offset number range.
Z LOW-LIMIT Specify a valid tool offset value range for the wear Z-axis in connection 
UP-LIMIT with a specified tool offset number range.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
RADIUS LOW-LIMIT Specify a valid tool offset value range for wear tool-nose radius in 
UP-LIMIT connection with a specified tool offset number range.
In the case of this system, all the information needed to set an input data range cannot be displayed in a 
single screen page. Set the information while switching pages using the [SWITCH] soft key. The screen 
provides an indication that lets you know which part of the information is currently displayed.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
6. SAFETY FUNCTIONS OPERATION B-64694EN/01
- 908 -
NOTE
The radius-related items are not displayed if the tool nose radius compensation
option is not displayed.
- What to set with Tool offset for milling and turning function
With tool offset for milling and turning function, an effective data range is specified using the 14 items in 
the Table6.7.3.2 (e).
Table6.7.3.2 (e) 
Displayed item What to set
RANGE FROM Specify a tool offset number range. TO
GEOM


key: chroma:document
string_value:
GEOM
X LOW-LIMIT Specify a valid tool offset value range for the geometry X-axis in 
UP-LIMIT connection with a specified tool offset number range.
Z/LENGTH LOW-LIMIT Specify a valid tool offset value range for the geometry Z-axis or 
UP-LIMIT geometry length in connection with a specified tool offset number range.
NOSE R/
RAD/
CORNER R
LOW-LIMIT Specify a valid tool offset value range for geometry tool-nose radius or 
geometry corner R in connection with a specified tool offset number 
range.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
range.
UP-LIMIT
WEAR
X LOW-LIMIT Specify a valid tool offset value range for the wear X-axis in connection 
UP-LIMIT with a specified tool offset number range.
Z/LENGTH LOW-LIMIT Specify a valid tool offset value range for the wear Z-axis or wear length
UP-LIMIT in connection with a specified tool offset number range.
NOSE R/
RAD/
CORNER R
LOW-LIMIT Specify a valid tool offset value range for wear tool-nose radius or wear


key: chroma:document
string_value:
UP-LIMIT corner R in connection with a specified tool offset number range.
In the case of this system, all the information needed to set an input data range cannot be displayed in a 
single screen page. Set the information while switching pages using the [SWITCH] soft key. The screen 
provides an indication that lets you know which part of the information is currently displayed.
NOTE
When the setting of cutter or tool nose radius compensation is valid (bit 7 (NCR)


key: chroma:document
string_value:
of parameter No. 8136 is set to 0), "NOSE R/RAD" items is displayed.
- Example of setting an input data range
For example, suppose that the following values are set with offset memory A.
FROM : TO LOW-LIMIT : UP-LIMIT
 1 : 20 0.000 : 100.000
In this case, the tool offset input screen accepts only offset values from 0.000 to 100.000 for offset 
numbers 1 to 20.
If you attempt to input any other value, the warning message "DATA IS OUT OF RANGE" is displayed.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
6.7.3.3 Workpiece origin offset range setting screen
This screen displays the setting status of workpiece origin offset and external workpiece origin offset 
effective data ranges and lets you change their settings. (Hereinafter, the screen is referred to as the 
workpiece origin offset range setting screen.)
Up to six pairs of values can be specified to identify workpiece coordinate ranges for the workpiece


key: chroma:document
string_value:
origin offset, and an effective offset value range can be defined for each of the axes of these six pairs.
As for the external workpiece origin offset, an effective offset value range can be specified for each axis.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64694EN/01 OPERATION 6. SAFETY FUNCTIONS
- 909 -
Displaying and setting the workpiece origin offset range setting screen
Procedure
1 Press the function key.
2 Press the continuous menu key at the right edge of the screen several times until the [GUARD] 
soft key is displayed.
3 Press the [GUARD] soft key. The setting screen that was displayed last with relation to any 
operation confirmation function is displayed (the operation confirmation function setting screen is


key: chroma:document
string_value:
the first such screen that appears after the system is restarted).
4 If any screen other than the workpiece origin offset range setting screen is displayed, press the 
[WORK] soft key. The workpiece origin offset range setting screen is displayed.
Fig. 6.7.3.3 Workpiece origin offset range setting screen
5 Press the soft key [(OPRT)].
6 Move the cursor to the item you want to set, by using the and keys, or , ,
, and keys.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
, and keys.
7 Press the MDI key, enter necessary data, and then press the [INPUT] soft key.
If the set effective data range is invalid for any of the reasons listed below, the input data range check is 
not performed normally and the input data is rejected.
- There is a workpiece coordinate overlap.
- The upper and lower limit values are reversed.
- The values are not effective (e.g., an invalid workpiece coordinate system is set).


key: chroma:document
string_value:
- The upper limit value is set for the workpiece coordinate system when 0 is set for the lower limit 
value.
Also, the input data range check is invalidated in the following cases.
- Both the upper and lower limit values for the workpiece coordinate system are 0.
- The upper and lower limit values for each offset are identical.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
6. SAFETY FUNCTIONS OPERATION B-64694EN/01
- 910 -
Explanation
- What to set for the workpiece origin offset
For the workpiece origin offset, an effective data range is specified using the four items in the Table 
6.7.3.3 (a).
Table 6.7.3.3 (a)
Displayed item What to set
RANGE FROM Specify a workpiece coordinate system range. TO
AXIS 
NAME
LOW-LIMIT Specify a valid offset value range in connection with a specified workpiece 
UP-LIMIT coordinate system range.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
- What to set for the external workpiece origin offset
For the external workpiece origin offset, an effective data range is specified using the two items in the 
Table 6.7.3.3 (b).
Table 6.7.3.3 (b)
Displayed item What to set
AXIS 
NAME
LOW-LIMIT Specify a valid external workpiece origin offset value range on each axis.
UP-LIMIT
6.7.3.4 Y-axis tool offset range setting screen
T
In the case of a lathe system or Tool offset for milling and turning function, this screen displays the


key: chroma:document
string_value:
setting status of Y-axis tool offset effective data ranges and lets you change their settings. (Hereinafter, 
the screen is referred to as the Y-axis tool offset range setting screen.)
Up to four pairs of values can be specified to identify Y-axis tool offset number ranges, and an effective 
offset value range can be defined for each of these four pairs.
Displaying and setting the Y-axis tool offset range setting screen
Procedure
1 Press the function key.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
1 Press the function key.
2 Press the continuous menu key at the right edge of the screen several times until the [GUARD] 
soft key is displayed.
3 Press the [GUARD] soft key. The setting screen that was displayed last with relation to any 
operation confirmation function is displayed (the operation confirmation function setting screen is 
the first such screen that appears after the system is restarted).


key: chroma:document
string_value:
4 If any screen other than the Y-axis tool offset range setting screen is displayed, press the [Y 
OFFSET] soft key. The Y-axis tool offset range setting screen is displayed. What is displayed in this 
screen differs depending on such factors as whether tool geometry/wear offsets are present.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64694EN/01 OPERATION 6. SAFETY FUNCTIONS
- 911 -
Fig. 6.7.3.4 Y-axis tool offset range setting screen
5 Press the soft key [(OPRT)].
6 Move the cursor to the item you want to set, by using the and keys, , ,
, and keys, or the [SWITCH] soft key.
7 Press the MDI key, enter necessary data, and then press the [INPUT] soft key.
If the set effective data range is invalid for any of the reasons listed below, the input data range check is 
not performed normally and the input data is rejected.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
- There is a tool offset number overlap.
- The upper and lower limit values are reversed.
- The values are not effective (e.g., more pairs of offset numbers than allowed are set).
- Either of the tool offset numbers is 0.
Also, the input data range check is invalidated in the following cases.
- Both the upper and lower limit values for the tool offset number are 0.
- The upper and lower offset limit values are identical.
Explanation
- What to set without geometry/wear offsets


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Without geometry/wear offsets, an effective data range is specified using the four items in the Table 
6.7.3.4 (a).
Table 6.7.3.4 (a)
Displayed item What to set
RANGE FROM Specify a Y-axis tool offset number range. TO
- LOW-LIMIT Specify a valid tool offset value range in connection with a specified Y-axis tool 
UP-LIMIT offset number range.
- What to set with geometry/wear offsets
With geometry/wear offsets, an effective data range is specified using the six items in the Table 6.7.3.4
(b).


key: chroma:document
string_value:
6. SAFETY FUNCTIONS OPERATION B-64694EN/01
- 912 -
Table 6.7.3.4 (b)
Displayed item What to set
RANGE FROM Specify a Y-axis tool offset number range. TO
GEOM LOW-LIMIT Specify a valid tool offset value range for geometry in connection with a 
UP-LIMIT specified Y-axis tool offset number range.
WEAR LOW-LIMIT Specify a valid tool offset value range for wear in connection with a specified 
UP-LIMIT Y-axis tool offset number range.
6.7.3.5 Workpiece shift range setting screen
T


key: chroma:document
string_value:
T
In the case of a lathe system, this screen displays the setting status of shift effective data ranges of 
workpiece shift coordinate systems and lets you change their settings. (Hereinafter, the screen is referred 
to as the workpiece shift range setting screen.)
An offset value range can be specified for each axis.
Displaying and setting workpiece shift input ranges
Procedure
1 Press the function key .


key: chroma:document
string_value:
1 Press the function key .
2 Press the continuous menu key at the right edge of the screen several times until the soft key 
[GUARD] is displayed.
3 Press the [GUARD] soft key. The setting screen that was displayed last with relation to any 
operation confirmation function is displayed (the operation confirmation function setting screen is 
the first such screen that appears after the system is restarted).


key: chroma:document
string_value:
4 If any screen other than the workpiece shift range setting screen is displayed, press the [WORK 
SHIFT] soft key. The workpiece shift range setting screen is displayed.
Fig. 6.7.3.5 Workpiece shift range setting screen
5 Press the soft key [(OPRT)].


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64694EN/01 OPERATION 6. SAFETY FUNCTIONS
- 913 -
6 Move the cursor to the item you want to set, by using the and keys, or , ,
, and keys.
7 Press the MDI key, enter necessary data, and then press the [INPUT] soft key.
If the set effective data range is invalid for any of the reasons listed below, the input data range check is 
not performed normally and the input data is rejected.
- The upper and lower limit values are reversed.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Also, the input data range check is invalidated in the following cases.
- The upper and lower offset limit values are identical.
Explanation
- What to set for the workpiece shift
For the workpiece shift, an effective data range is specified using the two items in the Table 6.7.3.5 .
Table 6.7.3.5
Displayed item What to set
AXIS 
NAME
LOW-LIMIT Specify a valid workpiece shift coordinate system shift value range on each axis. UP-LIMIT


key: chroma:document
string_value:
OPERATION B-64694EN/01
- 914 -
7. ALARM AND SELF-DIAGNOSIS 
FUNCTIONS
7 ALARM AND SELF-DIAGNOSIS 
FUNCTIONS
When an alarm occurs, the corresponding alarm screen appears to indicate the cause of the alarm. The 
causes of alarms are classified by error codes and number. Up to 60 previous alarms can be stored and 
displayed on the screen (alarm history display).
The system may sometimes seem to be at a halt, although no alarm is displayed. In this case, the system


key: chroma:document
string_value:
may be performing some processing. The state of the system can be checked using the self-diagnosis 
function.
7.1 ALARM DISPLAY
Explanation
- Alarm screen
When an alarm is issued, the display changes to the alarm screen. Two alarm screens "DETAIL" and 
"ALL PATH" are provided. You can choose one of the screens by pressing the corresponding soft key.
- Detail screen
Alarm information for the currently selected path is displayed.
Fig. 7.1 (a) Alarm detail screen


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64694EN/01 OPERATION
- 915 -
7. ALARM AND SELF-DIAGNOSIS 
FUNCTIONS
- All path screen
Alarm information for all paths is displayed sequentially from path 1.
Fig. 7.1 (b) All path screen
- Displaying an alarm screen
ALM is sometimes indicated in the bottom part of the screen display without displaying an alarm screen.
Fig. 7.1 (c) Parameter screen


key: chroma:document
string_value:
OPERATION B-64694EN/01
- 916 -
7. ALARM AND SELF-DIAGNOSIS 
FUNCTIONS
In this case, display the alarm screen by following the steps below.
1 Press the function key .
2 Press the soft key [ALARM].
3 Pressing the [ALARM] soft key changes the screen display to the "DETAIL" screen (or the alarm 
screen selected previously), and the [DETAIL] and [ALL PATH] soft keys appears.
- Pressing the [DETAIL] soft key displays the "DETAIL" screen.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
- Pressing the [ALL PATH] soft key displays the "ALL PATH" screen.
If the number of paths is 1, pressing the [ALARM] soft key displays the "DETAIL" screen, but the 
[ALARM] soft key indication remains unchanged.
4 You can change pages by using the page key.
- Releasing alarm
The cause of an alarm can be determined from the error code, number, and associated message. To release 
the alarm, generally correct the cause, then press the reset key.
- Error code and number


key: chroma:document
string_value:
- Error code and number
The type of an alarm is indicated by an error code and number.
Example: PS0010, SV0004, etc.
For details, see Appendix G, "ALARMS".
7.2 ALARM HISTORY DISPLAY
The CNC including the latest alarm are stored and displayed on the screen.
The display procedure is explained below.
NOTE
Alarms, operations, external operator messages, data change history data, etc. 
are stored in the same storage area. If the storage capacity is exceeded due to


key: chroma:document
string_value:
other history data, alarm history data may be erased. If, however, bit 2 (SAH) of 
parameter No. 11354 is 1, up to 50 alarms can be recorded regardless of the 
operation history state.
The maximum number of history data items that can be stored is as follows, 
where the history data is assumed to include alarm data only:
If bit 7 (HAL) of parameter No. 3196 is 1, about 4000 items.
If bit 7 (HAL) of parameter No. 3196 is 0, modal information and coordinates


key: chroma:document
string_value:
observed when an alarm is issued are also recorded, so that the maximum 
number varies from system to system.
(Example: For a 5-axis system, about 280 data items; for a 10-axis system, 
about 200 data items)
If bit 3 (EAH) of parameter No. 3112 is 1, however, macro and external alarm 
messages are also stored, so that the maximum number further decreases.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64694EN/01 OPERATION
- 917 -
7. ALARM AND SELF-DIAGNOSIS 
FUNCTIONS
Alarm history display
Procedure
1 Press the function key .
2 Press the soft key [HISTRY].
An alarm history is displayed.
The following information is displayed:
<1> Date and time of alarm issuance
<2> Alarm type
<3> Alarm number
<4> Alarm message (sometimes not displayed depending on the alarm)
<5> Page No.
3 You can change pages by using the page key.
Fig. 7.2 Alarm history screen


key: chroma:document
string_value:
OPERATION B-64694EN/01
- 918 -
7. ALARM AND SELF-DIAGNOSIS 
FUNCTIONS
7.3 CHECKING BY DIAGNOSTIC DISPLAY
The system may sometimes seem to be at a halt, although no alarm has occurred. In this case, the system 
may be performing some processing. Diagnostic display can be used to check the system status.
Procedure for Diagnostic display
Procedure
1 Press the function key .
2 Press the soft key [DIAGNOSIS].
3 The diagnosis screen has more than 1 pages. Select the screen by the following operation.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
(1) Change the page by the page change key.
(2) Method by soft key
- Key input the number of the diagnosis data to be displayed.
- Press the soft key [NO.SRH].
Fig. 7.3 Diagnostic display


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64694EN/01 OPERATION
- 919 -
7. ALARM AND SELF-DIAGNOSIS 
FUNCTIONS
7.4 RETURN FROM THE ALARM SCREEN
7.4.1 Return from the Alarm Screen
When alarms are cleared or function key is pressed on the alarm screen, the screen displayed 
before the alarm screen appears.
To enable this function, set bit 4 (ADC) of parameter No. 11302 is set to 1.
Switching between screens when alarms are cleared
When all alarms are cleared on the alarm screen, the screen displayed before the alarm screen appears


key: chroma:document
string_value:
again.
When the alarm screen was displayed automatically due to occurrence of an alarm, the screen displayed 
immediately before the alarm appears again.
When the alarm screen was displayed by pressing function key during occurrence of an alarm, the 
screen displayed immediately before the alarm appears again.
(Example)
NOTE
Even if alarms are cleared when the alarm screen is not displayed, the current 
screen is not changed.
Switching between screens by the function key


key: chroma:document
string_value:
When function key is pressed on the alarm screen, the screen displayed before the alarm screen 
appears. Press function key to switch to the alarm screen for checking for alarms and then press 
function key to return to the previous screen.
(Example)
Occurrence of
an alarm
PROGRAM screen ALARM screen
Clearing of
alarm
PROGRAM screen
Function key 
ALARM screen
Function key


key: chroma:document
string_value:
OPERATION B-64694EN/01
- 920 -
7. ALARM AND SELF-DIAGNOSIS 
FUNCTIONS
If function key is pressed when the alarm screen was displayed automatically due to occurrence of 
an alarm, the screen displayed before the alarm screen appears again.
Restrictions
- Switching to the custom screen is not performed.
- The screens to which the alarm screen can be switched are only the screen selected by the chapter 
selection soft key.
7.4.2 Relationship with Other Functions


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Relationship between the screen switching function and a return from the 
alarm screen during switching between paths
(1) When bit 5 (PSC) of parameter No. 3208 is set to 0, if paths are switched by the path switching 
signal, the screen last selected in the path appears again.
At this time, even if a return from the alarm screen to the previous screen is performed in one path, a 
return is not performed in the other path and the alarm screen remains displayed.
(Example)
Path 1
Path 2


key: chroma:document
string_value:
(Example)
Path 1
Path 2
Offset Alarm
Position Alarm <3>
<4>
<5>
<1>
<2>
<1> When the message key is pressed on the offset screen of path 1, the alarm screen (path 1) 
appears.
<2> When switching to path 2 is performed on the alarm screen of path 1, the position screen of 
path 2 appears (when the screen last displayed in path 2 is the position screen).
<3> When the message key is pressed on the position screen of path 2, the alarm screen (path 2) 
appears.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
appears.
<4> When the alarm is cleared or the message key is pressed on the alarm screen of path 2, a return 
to the position screen (path 2) is performed.
<5> When switching to path 1 is performed, the alarm screen (path 1) appears.
(2) When PSC is set to 1, if paths are switched by the path switching signal, the screen displayed 
immediately before the path switching appears again.
At this time, if a return from the alarm screen to the previous screen is performed in one path, the


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64694EN/01 OPERATION
- 921 -
7. ALARM AND SELF-DIAGNOSIS 
FUNCTIONS
(Example)
Path 1
 
Path 2
 
Offset Alarm
Offset Alarm <3>
<4> <2>
<1>
<1> When the message key is pressed on the offset screen of path 1, the alarm screen (path 1) 
appears.
<2> When switching to path 2 is performed on the alarm screen of path 1, the alarm screen (path 2) 
appears.
<3> When the alarm is cleared on the alarm screen of path 2, the offset screen (path 2) appears.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
8. DATA INPUT/OUTPUT OPERATION B-64694EN/01
- 922 - 
8 DATA INPUT/OUTPUT 
Information stored in external I/O devices can be read into the CNC, and information can be written into 
external I/O devices. 
External I/O devices include memory cards and USB memory that can be mounted to the memory card 
interface located on the left side of the display unit and personal computers and data servers that can be 
connected via embedded Ethernet.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
The following types of data in the Table 8 (a) can be input and output. 
Table 8 (a) 
Data type Default file name Reference 
item 
Program ALL-PROG.TXT 8.2.1 
Parameter CNC-PARA.TXT 8.2.2 
Offset data TOOLOFST.TXT 8.2.3 
Pitch error compensation data PITCH.TXT 8.2.4 
Custom macro common variable MACRO.TXT 8.2.5 
Workpiece coordinate system data EXT_WKZ.TXT 8.2.6 
Operation history data OPRT_HIS.TXT 8.2.7 
Tool management data (tool management function) TOOL_MNG.TXT 8.2.8.1-2


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Magazine data (tool management function) MAGAZINE.TXT 8.2.8.3-4 
Tool life status name (tool management function) STATUS.TXT 8.2.8.5-6 
Customize data name (tool management function) CUSTOMIZ.TXT 8.2.8.7-8 
Customize data displayed as tool management data (tool management 
expansion) DISPCSTM.TXT 8.2.8.9-10 
Spindle waiting position name (tool management expansion) POSNAME.TXT 8.2.8.11-12 
Decimal point position data of customize data (tool management 
expansion) POINTPOS.TXT 8.2.8.13-14


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Tool geometry data (tool management function for oversize tools) TOOLGEOM.TXT 8.2.8.15-16 
Tool life management data TOOLLIFE.TXT 8.2.9 
Maintenance information MAINTINF.TXT 
Periodic maintenance data (periodic maintenance: status screen) MAINTENA.TXT 
Second geometry tool offset SEC_GEOM.TXT 
Real time custom macro variable RTMMACRO.TXT 
System configuration data SYS-CONF.TXT 
PMC signal protect DIDOENBL.TXT 
Cause data (tool management tool attachment/detachment function) TLCAUSE.TXT


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Attachment history data (tool management tool attachment/detachment 
function) TLATAHIS.TXT 
Detachment history data (tool management tool attachment/detachment 
function) TLDTAHIS.TXT 
Servo/spindle information SV_SP_ID.TXT 
Machine system name data (periodic maintenance: machine system 
screen) MAINTEMC.TXT 
Servo waveform diagnosis WAVE-DGN.TXT 
Tool geometry data (interference check for each path) TOOL-FRM.TXT 
P code variable PCODE.TXT 
M code group data MC-GROUP.TXT


key: chroma:document
string_value:
The above types of data can be input and output on the screens for displaying and setting those types of 
data. 
If NC data such as programs and parameters is to be written to a memory card or USB memory, and if a 
file with the same name already exists, it is possible to select whether to overwrite the existing file or 
cancel writing with appropriate operation.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64694EN/01 OPERATION 8. DATA INPUT/OUTPUT
- 923 - 
This function is enabled by setting bit 1 (COW) of parameter No. 11308. 
The external I/O device set in NC parameter No. 0020 is selected. See the Table 8 (b) below for details. 
Table 8 (b) 
Correspondence between settings and input/output units 
Setting Description 
0,1 RS-232C serial port 1 
2 RS-232C serial port 2 
4 Memory card interface 
5 Data server interface 
9 Embedded Ethernet interface 
17 USB memory interface 
NOTE


key: chroma:document
string_value:
NOTE 
1 If the external input/output device is other than a data server interface or 
embedded Ethernet interface, a file name of up to 12 characters can be handled. 
NC programs on the memory of the CNC can each be assigned any file name of 
up to 32 characters, but the name is restricted to up to 12 characters in the 
input/output to and from external I/O devices. 
2 If the external input/output device is a data server interface, embedded Ethernet


key: chroma:document
string_value:
interface, or USB memory interface, a file name of up to 32 characters can be 
handled. 
3 When a memory card or USB memory interface is used as an external I/O 
device, up to 512 files can be handled. 
8.1 OVERWRITING FILES ON A MEMORY CARD/USB 
MEMORY 
Screen display 
When an attempt is made to output NC data to a memory card, and if the specified file name or the default 
file name is the same as an existing file name on the memory card or USB memory, a confirmation


key: chroma:document
string_value:
message "OVERWRITE?" appears. (Bit 1 (COW) of parameter No. 11308 = 1) 
Fig. 8.1 (a) Screen display example


key: chroma:document
string_value:
8. DATA INPUT/OUTPUT OPERATION B-64694EN/01
- 924 - 
Procedure 
On the output screen for the desired function, perform the following operation. 
1 Press the soft key [F OUTPUT]. 
2 Press the soft key [EXEC]. If a file with the same name does not exist on the memory card or USB 
memory, the file is output in this step. 
3 If a file with the same name exists on the memory card or USB memory, soft keys [REWRITE] and 
[CAN] appear. 
Pressing the soft key [REWRITE] causes the file to be overwritten.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Pressing the soft key [CAN] causes output to be canceled. 
Example) Output from the parameter screen (for 10.4-inch display unit) 
1 Press the function key . 
2 Press the soft key [PARAMETER]. 
3 Enter the EDIT mode or state emergency stop. 
4 Press the soft key [(OPRT)]. 
5 Press the soft key [F OUTPUT]. The soft key display switches from the one in Fig. 8.1 (b) to the one 
in Fig. 8.1 (c). 
6 Press the soft key [EXEC]. Because no file name is specified, the file is output with a file name of


key: chroma:document
string_value:
CNC-PARA.TXT, but if a file with the same name exists on the memory card, the soft key display 
switches from the one in Fig. 8.1 (c) to the one in Fig. 8.1 (d), with a confirmation message 
appearing. 
If a file with the same name does not exist on the memory card or USB memory, the file is output 
directly. 
7 Pressing the soft key [REWRITE] causes the file to be overwritten. 
Pressing the soft key [CAN] causes output to be canceled. If wishing to output the file after changing


key: chroma:document
string_value:
the file name, specify a file name after step 6, and perform step 7 again. 
Fig. 8.1 (b) Soft key display before [F OUTPUT] is pressed 
Fig. 8.1 (c) Soft key display after [F OUTPUT] is pressed 
Fig. 8.1 (d) Soft key display after [EXEC] is pressed 
Example) Output from the parameter screen (for 15/19-inch display unit) 
1 Press the function key . 
2 Press the vertical soft key [PARAMETER]. 
3 Enter the EDIT mode or state emergency stop.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
4 Press the horizontal soft key [F OUTPUT]. The horizontal soft key display switches from the one 
shown in Fig. 8.1 (e) to the one in Fig. 8.1 (f). 
5 Press the horizontal soft key [EXEC]. Because no file name is specified, the file is output with a file 
name of CNC-PARA.TXT, but if a file with the same name exists on the memory card or USB 
memory, the horizontal soft key display switches from the one in Fig. 8.1 (f) to the one in Fig. 8.1 
(g), with a confirmation message appearing.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
If a file with the same name does not exist on the memory card or USB memory, the file is output 
directly.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64694EN/01 OPERATION 8. DATA INPUT/OUTPUT
- 925 - 
6 Pressing the horizontal soft key [REWRITE] causes the file to be overwritten. 
Pressing the horizontal soft key [CAN] causes output to be canceled. If wishing to output the file 
after changing the file name, specify a file name after step 4, and perform step 5 again. 
Fig. 8.1 (e) Soft key display before [F OUTPUT] is pressed 
Fig. 8.1 (f) Soft key display after [F OUTPUT] is pressed 
Fig. 8.1 (g) Soft key display after [EXEC] is pressed


key: chroma:document
string_value:
CAUTION 
 For a memory card, even if soft key [REWRITE] is pressed, warning message 
“OVER WRITE FAILED” is displayed and the output is canceled in the following 
cases. For a USB memory, alarm SR1925 or SR1928 is displayed and the 
output is canceled. 
- The file to be overwritten is for read only. 
- The memory card is pulled out while the confirmation message appears. 
8.2 INPUT/OUTPUT ON EACH SCREEN


key: chroma:document
string_value:
This section explains how to input and output data of the following types to and from each operation 
screen: program, parameter, offset, pitch error compensation, macro variable, workpiece coordinate 
system data, operation history, and tool management. 
8.2.1 Inputting and Outputting a Program 
8.2.1.1 Inputting a program 
The following explains how to input a program from an external device to the memory of the CNC by 
using the program editing screen or program folder screen.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Inputting a program (for 10.4-inch display unit) 
Procedure 
1 Make sure the input device is ready for reading. 
2 Press the function key to display the program editing screen or program folder screen. 
3 Press the EDIT switch on the machine operator’s panel. 
4 Press the soft key [(OPRT)]. 
5 Press the continuous menu key until soft key [F INPUT] appears. 
Press the soft key [F INPUT]. 
6 Type the name of the file that you want to input.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Press the soft key [F SET]. To specify the program name to input, type the program name and press 
the soft key [P SET].


key: chroma:document
string_value:
8. DATA INPUT/OUTPUT OPERATION B-64694EN/01
- 926 - 
If the input file name is omitted, default input file name “ALL-PROG.TXT” is assumed. 
For an explanation of the operations to be performed if an input file name [F SET] and an input 
program name [P SET] are omitted, see the 
Table 8.2.1.1 (a). 
7 If you input the program, press the soft key [EXEC]. 
If you do not input the program, press the soft key [CAN]. Soft keys return to the operation selection 
soft keys.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
soft keys. 
When the input operation starts, “INPUT” blinks in the lower right part of the screen. When the 
operation ends, the “INPUT” indication disappears. 
Once read, the program is registered in the currently selected foreground folder. 
NOTE 
1 Foreground folders are displayed on the program folder screen. For an 
explanation of foreground folders, see II-12.1.3, and for how to change 
foreground folders, see III-11.6


key: chroma:document
string_value:
2 When the programs and folders are inputted/outputted on the program list 
screen of folder tree display, set bit 7(FLI) of parameter No.11364 to 1. 
Table 8.2.1.1 (a) 
[F SET] [P SET] Input file name Input program Input program name 
BLANK BLANK ALL-PROG.TXT All programs in ALL-PROG.TXT File name at the time the file is saved 
BLANK INPUT ALL-PROG.TXT First program in ALL-PROG.TXT Program name set with [P SET] 
INPUT BLANK File name set 
with [F SET] 
All programs in the file specified


key: chroma:document
string_value:
with [F SET] File name at the time the file is saved 
INPUT INPUT File name set 
with [F SET] 
First program in the file specified 
with [F SET] Program name set with [P SET] 
Inputting a program (for 15/19-inch display unit) 
Procedure 
1 Make sure the input device is ready for reading. 
2 Press the function key . 
3 Press the vertical soft key [PROGRAM] or [FOLDER] to display programs or a program directory. 
4 Press the EDIT switch on the machine operator’s panel.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
5 Press the continuous menu key until horizontal soft key [F INPUT] appears. 
Press the horizontal soft key [F INPUT]. 
6 Type the name of the file that you want to input. 
Press the horizontal soft key [F SET]. To specify the program name to input, type the program name 
and press the horizontal soft key [P SET]. 
If the input file name is omitted, default input file name “ALL-PROG.TXT” is assumed. 
For an explanation of the operations to be performed if an input file name [F SET] and an input


key: chroma:document
string_value:
program name [P SET] are omitted, see the Table 8.2.1.1 (b). 
7 If you input the program, press the horizontal soft key [EXEC]. 
If you do not input the program, press the horizontal soft key [CAN]. Soft keys return to the 
operation selection soft keys. 
When the input operation starts, “INPUT” blinks in the lower right part of the screen. When the 
operation ends, the “INPUT” indication disappears. 
Once read, the program is registered in the currently selected foreground folder.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64694EN/01 OPERATION 8. DATA INPUT/OUTPUT
- 927 - 
NOTE 
1 Foreground folders are displayed on the program folder screen. For an 
explanation of foreground folders, see II-12.1.3, and for how to change 
foreground folders, see III-11.6 
2 When the programs and folders are inputted/outputted on the program list 
screen of folder tree display, set bit 7(FLI) of parameter No.11364 to 1. 
Table 8.2.1.1 (b) 
[F SET] [P SET] Input file name Input program Input program name


key: chroma:document
string_value:
BLANK BLANK ALL-PROG.TXT All programs in ALL-PROG.TXT File name at the time the file is saved 
BLANK INPUT ALL-PROG.TXT First program in ALL-PROG.TXT Program name set with [P SET] 
INPUT BLANK File name set 
with [F SET] 
All programs in the file specified 
with [F SET] File name at the time the file is saved 
INPUT INPUT File name set 
with [F SET] 
First program in the file specified 
with [F SET] Program name set with [P SET] 
8.2.1.2 Outputting a program


key: chroma:document
string_value:
8.2.1.2 Outputting a program 
A program stored in the memory of the CNC unit is output to an external device. 
Outputting a program (for 10.4-inch display unit) 
Procedure 
1 Make sure the output device is ready for output. 
2 Press the function key to display the program editing screen or program folder screen. 
3 Press the EDIT switch on the machine operator’s panel. 
4 Press the soft key [(OPRT)]. 
5 Press the continuous menu key until soft key [F OUTPUT] appears.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Press the soft key [F OUTPUT]. 
6 Type the program number to output and press the soft key [P SET]. To specify an output file name, 
type the output file name and press the soft key [F SET]. 
To output multiple programs at one time, type the start program number and the end program 
number separated by comma (,), and then press the soft key [P SET]. 
If, in this step, no output file name or no program name is specified, all programs in the foreground 
folders are output to "ALL-PROG.TXT".


key: chroma:document
string_value:
For an explanation of the operations to be performed if an output file name [F SET] and an output 
program name [P SET] are omitted, see the Table 8.2.1.2 (a). 
7 If you output the program, press the soft key [EXEC]. 
If you do not output the program, press the soft key [CAN]. Soft keys return to the operation 
selection soft keys. 
When the output operation starts, “OUTPUT” blinks in the lower right part of the screen. When the 
operation ends, the “OUTPUT” indication disappears. 
NOTE


key: chroma:document
string_value:
NOTE 
1 Foreground folders are displayed on the program folder screen. For an 
explanation of foreground folders, see II-12.1.3, and for how to change 
foreground folders, see III-11.6 
2 When the programs and folders are inputted/outputted on the program list 
screen of folder tree display, set bit 7(FLI) of parameter No.11364 to 1.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
8. DATA INPUT/OUTPUT OPERATION B-64694EN/01
- 928 - 
Table 8.2.1.2 (a) 
[F SET] [P SET] Output file name Output program 
BLANK BLANK or (O-9999) ALL-PROG.TXT All programs in the foreground folders 
displayed in the program folder 
BLANK INPUT Program name set with [P SET] Program in the NC that is set with [P SET] 
BLANK Oxxxx,Oyyyy ALL-PROG.TXT Programs No.xxxx to No.yyyy that is set 
with [P SET] 
INPUT BLANK or (O-9999) File name set with [F SET] All programs in the foreground folders


key: chroma:document
string_value:
displayed in the program folder 
INPUT INPUT File name set with [F SET] Program in the NC that is set with [P SET] 
INPUT Oxxxx,Oyyyy File name set with [F SET] Programs No.xxxx to No.yyyy that is set 
with [P SET] 
Outputting a program (for 15/19-inch display unit) 
Procedure 
1 Make sure the output device is ready for output. 
2 Press the function key . 
3 Press the vertical soft key [PROGRAM] or [FOLDER] to display programs or a program directory.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
4 Press the EDIT switch on the machine operator’s panel. 
5 Press the continuous menu key until horizontal soft key [F OUTPUT] appears. 
Press the horizontal soft key [F OUTPUT]. 
6 Type the program number to output and press the horizontal soft key [P SET]. To specify an output 
file name, type the output file name and press the horizontal soft key [F SET]. 
To output multiple programs at one time, type the start program number and the end program


key: chroma:document
string_value:
number separated by comma (,), and then press the soft key [P SET]. 
If, in this step, no output file name or no program name is specified, all programs in the foreground 
folders are output to “ALL-PROG.TXT”. 
For an explanation of the operations to be performed if an output file name [F SET] and an output 
program name [P SET] are omitted, see the Table 8.2.1.2 (b). 
7 If you output the program, press the horizontal soft key [EXEC].


key: chroma:document
string_value:
If you do not output the program, press the horizontal soft key [CAN]. Soft keys return to the 
operation selection soft keys. 
When the output operation starts, “OUTPUT” blinks in the lower right part of the screen. When the 
operation ends, the “OUTPUT” indication disappears. 
NOTE 
1 Foreground folders are displayed on the program folder screen. For an 
explanation of foreground folders, see II-12.1.3, and for how to change 
foreground folders, see III-11.6


key: chroma:document
string_value:
2 When the programs and folders are inputted/outputted on the program list 
screen of folder tree display, set bit 7(FLI) of parameter No.11364 to 1. 
Table 8.2.1.2 (b) 
[F SET] [P SET] Output file name Output program 
BLANK BLANK or (O-9999) ALL-PROG.TXT All programs in the foreground folders 
displayed in the program folder 
BLANK INPUT Program name set with [P SET] Program in the NC that is set with [P SET] 
BLANK Oxxxx,Oyyyy ALL-PROG.TXT Programs No.xxxx to No.yyyy that is set 
with [P SET]


key: chroma:document
string_value:
with [P SET] 
INPUT BLANK or (O-9999) File name set with [F SET] All programs in the foreground folders 
displayed in the program folder 
INPUT INPUT File name set with [F SET] Program in the NC that is set with [P SET]


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64694EN/01 OPERATION 8. DATA INPUT/OUTPUT
- 929 - 
[F SET] [P SET] Output file name Output program 
INPUT Oxxxx,Oyyyy File name set with [F SET] Programs No.xxxx to No.yyyy that is set 
with [P SET] 
8.2.1.3 Inputting and outputting of O8-digit 
When the file name is not specified, the file name that is output and input is different according to the 
digit of the program number and the external input/output device. 
- Outputting program 
 The program is output with the following file name.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Table 8.2.1.3 
Program number External input/output device File name 
7-digit or less 
(Example: 12345) 
Excluding Fast Data Server or Fast Data Server 
excluding in the storage mode 
“O” plus a 7-digit numeric 
(Example: O0012345) 
Fast Data Server in the storage mode “O” plus a 8-digit numeric 
(Example: O00012345) 
8-digit 
(Example: 12345678) ALL a 8-digit numeric 
(Example: 12345678) 
- Inputting program


key: chroma:document
string_value:
- Inputting program 
 When the external input/output device is excluding Fast Data Server or Fast Data Server excluding 
in the storage mode, an input file name is “O”+7-digit numeric. 
 When Fast Data Server in the storage mode, an input file name is “O”+8-digit numeric. 
8.2.2 Inputting and Outputting Parameters 
8.2.2.1 Inputting parameters 
Parameters are loaded into the memory of the CNC unit from an external device. The input format is the


key: chroma:document
string_value:
same as the output format. When a parameter is loaded which has the same data number as a parameter 
already registered in the memory, the loaded parameter replaces the existing parameter. 
Inputting parameters (for 10.4-inch display unit) 
Procedure 
1 Make sure the input device is ready for reading. 
2 Press the function key . 
3 Press the continuous menu key until soft key [SETTING] appears. 
Press the soft key [SETTING].


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Press the soft key [SETTING]. 
4 Press the MDI switch on the machine operator’s panel or enter state emergency stop. 
5 Enter 1 in response to the prompt for “PARAMETER WRITE” in setting data. 
Alarm SW0100, “PARAMETER ENABLE SWITCH ON” appears. 
6 Press the function key . 
7 Press the soft key [PARAMETER], then the parameter screen appears. 
8 Press the EDIT switch on the machine operator’s panel or enter state emergency stop. 
9 Press the soft key [(OPRT)].


key: chroma:document
string_value:
10 Press the continuous menu key until soft key [F INPUT] appears. 
Press the soft key [F INPUT]. 
11 Type the name of the file that you want to input. 
If the input file name is omitted, default input file name “CNC-PARA.TXT” is assumed.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
8. DATA INPUT/OUTPUT OPERATION B-64694EN/01
- 930 - 
12 Press the soft key [EXEC]. 
This starts reading the parameter, and “INPUT” blinks in the lower right part of the screen. When 
the read operation ends, the “INPUT” indication disappears. 
To cancel the input of the parameter, press the soft key [CAN]. 
13 Press the function key . 
14 Press the soft key [SETTING]. 
15 Press the MDI switch on the machine operator’s panel or enter state emergency stop.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
16 Enter 0 in response to the prompt for “PARAMETER WRITE” in setting data. 
17 Turn the power of the CNC on again. 
Inputting parameters (for 15/19-inch display unit) 
Procedure 
1 Make sure the input device is ready for reading. 
2 Press the function key . 
3 Press the vertical soft key [NEXT PAGE] until vertical soft key [SETTING] appears. 
Press the vertical soft key [SETTING]. 
4 Press the MDI switch on the machine operator’s panel or enter state emergency stop.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
5 Enter 1 in response to the prompt for “PARAMETER WRITE” in setting data. 
Alarm SW0100, “PARAMETER ENABLE SWITCH ON” appears. 
6 Press the function key . 
7 Press the vertical soft key [NEXT PAGE] until vertical soft key [PARAMETER] appears. 
Press the vertical soft key [PARAMETER], then the parameter screen appears. 
8 Press the EDIT switch on the machine operator’s panel or enter state emergency stop. 
9 Press the horizontal soft key [F INPUT].


key: chroma:document
string_value:
10 Type the name of the file that you want to input. 
If the input file name is omitted, default input file name “CNC-PARA.TXT” is assumed. 
11 Press the horizontal soft key [EXEC]. 
This starts reading the parameter, and “INPUT” blinks in the lower right part of the screen. When 
the read operation ends, the “INPUT” indication disappears. 
To cancel the input of the parameter, press the horizontal soft key [CAN]. 
12 Press the function key . 
13 Press the vertical soft key [SETTING].


key: chroma:document
string_value:
14 Press the MDI switch on the machine operator’s panel or enter state emergency stop. 
15 Enter 0 in response to the prompt for “PARAMETER WRITE” in setting data. 
16 Turn the power of the CNC on again. 
8.2.2.2 Outputting parameters 
All parameters are output in a defined output format from the memory of the CNC to an external device. 
Outputting parameters (for 10.4-inch display unit) 
Procedure 
1 Make sure the output device is ready for output. 
2 Press the function key .


key: chroma:document
string_value:
2 Press the function key . 
3 Press the soft key [PARAMETER], then the parameter screen appears. 
4 Press the EDIT switch on the machine operator’s panel or enter state emergency stop. 
5 Press the soft key [(OPRT)].


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64694EN/01 OPERATION 8. DATA INPUT/OUTPUT
- 931 - 
6 Press the continuous menu key until soft key [F OUTPUT] appears. 
Press the soft key [F OUTPUT]. 
7 Type the file name that you want to output. 
If the file name is omitted, default file name “CNC-PARA.TXT” is assumed. 
8 Press the soft key [EXEC]. 
This starts outputting the parameter, and “OUTPUT” blinks in the lower right part of the screen. 
When the write operation ends, the “OUTPUT” indication disappears.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
To cancel the output, press the soft key [CAN]. 
Outputting parameters (for 15/19-inch display unit) 
Procedure 
1 Make sure the output device is ready for output. 
2 Press the function key . 
3 Press the vertical soft key [NEXT PAGE] until vertical soft key [PARAMETER] appears. 
Press the vertical soft key [PARAMETER], then the parameter screen appears. 
4 Press the EDIT switch on the machine operator’s panel or enter state emergency stop. 
5 Press the horizontal soft key [F OUTPUT].


key: chroma:document
string_value:
6 Type the file name that you want to output. 
If the file name is omitted, default file name “CNC-PARA.TXT” is assumed. 
7 Press the horizontal soft key [EXEC]. 
This starts outputting the parameter, and “OUTPUT” blinks in the lower right part of the screen. 
When the write operation ends, the “OUTPUT” indication disappears. 
To cancel the output, press the horizontal soft key [CAN]. 
Explanation 
 - Suppressing output of parameters set to 0


key: chroma:document
string_value:
When bit 1 (PRM) of parameter No. 0010 is set to 1, and soft key [EXEC] is pressed, the parameters in 
the Table 8.2.2.2 are not output: 
Table 8.2.2.2 
 Other than axis type Axis type 
Bit type Parameter for which all bits are set to 0. Parameter for an axis for which all bits are set to 0. 
Value type Parameter whose value is 0. Parameter for an axis for which the value is 0. 
8.2.3 Inputting and Outputting Offset Data 
8.2.3.1 Inputting offset data


key: chroma:document
string_value:
8.2.3.1 Inputting offset data 
Offset data is loaded into the memory of the CNC from an external device. The input format is the same 
as for offset value output. When an offset value is loaded which has the same offset number as an offset 
number already registered in the memory, the loaded offset data replaces existing data. 
Inputting offset data (for 10.4-inch display unit) 
Procedure 
1 Make sure the input device is ready for reading. 
2 Press the function key .


key: chroma:document
string_value:
2 Press the function key . 
3 Press the continuous menu key until soft key [OFFSET] appears. 
Press the soft key [OFFSET]. 
4 Press the EDIT switch on the machine operator’s panel or enter state emergency stop.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
8. DATA INPUT/OUTPUT OPERATION B-64694EN/01
- 932 - 
5 Press the soft key [(OPRT)]. 
6 Press the continuous menu key until soft key [F INPUT] appears. 
Press the soft key [F INPUT]. 
7 Type the name of the file that you want to input. 
If the input file name is omitted, default input file name “TOOLOFST.TXT” is assumed. 
8 Press the soft key [EXEC]. 
This starts reading the offset data, and “INPUT” blinks in the lower right part of the screen. When


key: chroma:document
string_value:
the read operation ends, the “INPUT” indication disappears. 
To cancel the input of the offset data, press the soft key [CAN]. 
Inputting offset data (for 15/19-inch display unit) 
Procedure 
1 Make sure the input device is ready for reading. 
2 Press the function key . 
3 Press the vertical soft key [NEXT PAGE] until vertical soft key [OFFSET] appears. 
Press the vertical soft key [OFFSET]. 
4 Press the EDIT switch on the machine operator’s panel or enter state emergency stop.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
5 Press the horizontal soft key [F INPUT]. 
6 Type the name of the file that you want to input. 
If the input file name is omitted, default input file name “TOOLOFST.TXT” is assumed. 
7 Press the horizontal soft key [EXEC]. 
This starts reading the offset data, and “INPUT” blinks in the lower right part of the screen. When 
the read operation ends, the “INPUT” indication disappears. 
To cancel the input of the offset data, press the horizontal soft key [CAN]. 
8.2.3.2 Outputting offset data


key: chroma:document
string_value:
All offset data is output in a defined output format from the memory of the CNC to an external device. 
Outputting offset data (for 10.4-inch display unit) 
Procedure 
1 Make sure the output device is ready for output. 
2 Press the function key . 
3 Press the continuous menu key until soft key [OFFSET] appears. 
Press the soft key [OFFSET]. 
4 Press the EDIT switch on the machine operator’s panel or enter state emergency stop. 
5 Press the soft key [(OPRT)].


key: chroma:document
string_value:
6 Press the continuous menu key until soft key [F OUTPUT] appears. 
Press the soft key [F OUTPUT]. 
7 Type the file name that you want to output. 
If the file name is omitted, default file name “TOOLOFST.TXT” is assumed. 
8 Press the soft key [EXEC]. 
This starts outputting the offset data, and “OUTPUT” blinks in the lower right part of the screen. 
When the write operation ends, the “OUTPUT” indication disappears. 
To cancel the output, press the soft key [CAN].


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64694EN/01 OPERATION 8. DATA INPUT/OUTPUT
- 933 - 
Outputting offset data (for 15/19-inch display unit) 
Procedure 
1 Make sure the output device is ready for output. 
2 Press the function key . 
3 Press the vertical soft key [NEXT PAGE] until vertical soft key [OFFSET] appears. 
Press the vertical soft key [OFFSET]. 
4 Press the EDIT switch on the machine operator’s panel or enter state emergency stop. 
5 Press the horizontal soft key [F OUTPUT]. 
6 Type the file name that you want to output.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
If the file name is omitted, default file name “TOOLOFST.TXT” is assumed. 
7 Press the horizontal soft key [EXEC]. 
This starts outputting the offset data, and “OUTPUT” blinks in the lower right part of the screen. 
When the write operation ends, the “OUTPUT” indication disappears. 
To cancel the output, press the horizontal soft key [CAN]. 
Explanation 
 - Output format 
Output format is as follows: 
M
- Tool compensation memory A (bit 6 (NGW) of parameter No.8136 = 1) 
% 
G10 G90 P01 R_ Q_


key: chroma:document
string_value:
% 
G10 G90 P01 R_ Q_ 
G10 G90 P02 R_ Q_ 
 : 
G10 G90 P_ R_ 
% 
Q_ : Virtual tool nose number (TIP). Not output when the virtual tool nose direction is not 
used. 
P_ : Tool offset number (1 to the number of tool compensation pairs) 
R_ : Tool compensation data. Output with a decimal point in the input unit used at output. 
- Tool compensation memory C (bit 6 (NGW) of parameter No.8136 = 0) 
% 
G10 G90 L10 P01 R_ Q_ 
G10 G90 L11 P01 R_ 
G10 G90 L12 P01 R_ 
G10 G90 L13 P01 R_


key: chroma:document
string_value:
G10 G90 L13 P01 R_ 
G10 G90 L10 P02 R_ Q_ 
 : 
G10 G90 L12 P_ R_ 
G10 G90 L13 P_ R_ 
% 
L10 : Geometry compensation amount corresponding to the H code 
L11 : Wear compensation amount corresponding to the H code 
L12 : Geometry compensation amount corresponding to the D code 
L13 : Wear compensation amount corresponding to the D code 
Q_, P_, and R_ have the same meanings as for tool compensation memory A.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
8. DATA INPUT/OUTPUT OPERATION B-64694EN/01
- 934 - 
T
The tool compensation amount and tool nose radius compensation amount are output in the following 
format. 
% 
G10 P01 X_ Z_ R_ Q_ Y_ 
G10 P02 X_ Z_ R_ Q_ Y_ 
 : 
G10 P__ X_ Z_ R_ Q_ Y_ 
G10 P10001 X_ Z_ R_ Y_ 
G10 P10002 X_ Z_ R_ Y_ 
 : 
G10 P100__ X_ Z_ R_ Y_ 
% 
P_: Tool compensation number (1 to the number of tool compensation pairs) 
 Tool offset number: Specification of the tool compensation amount and tool wear


key: chroma:document
string_value:
compensation amount 
 10000 + tool offset number: Specification of the tool geometry compensation amount 
X_: Tool compensation data (X). Output with a decimal point in the input unit used at 
output. 
Z_: Tool compensation data (Z). Same as X_. 
R_: Tool nose radius offset amount (R). The data format is the same as for X_. 
 When tool nose radius compensation is not provided, this item is not output. 
Q_: Virtual tool nose number (TIP). When tool nose radius compensation is not provided,


key: chroma:document
string_value:
this item is not output. 
Y_: Tool compensation data (Y). The data format is the same as for X_. 
 When no Y-axis offset is provided, this item is not output. 
The second geometry tool offset data is output in the following format. 
% 
G10 P20001 X_ Z_ Y_ 
G10 P20002 X_ Z_ Y_ 
 : 
G10 P200__ X_ Z_ Y_ 
% 
P_ : Tool compensation number (1 to the number of tool compensation pairs) 
 Tool offset number: Specification of the tool compensation amount and tool wear 
compensation amount


key: chroma:document
string_value:
compensation amount 
 20000 + tool offset number: Specification of the second tool geometry compensation 
amount 
The other addresses are the same as for the tool compensation amount. 
NOTE 
 The input format and output format do not depend on the G-code system A/B/C. 
 - Address name changing of output format 
When bit 2 (OFN) of parameter No.11403 is set to 1, the specification address in "Y-axis offset and


key: chroma:document
string_value:
4th/5th axis offset" can use address name 'A' or 'B' instead of default specification address 'Y', 'E' and 'F'.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64694EN/01 OPERATION 8. DATA INPUT/OUTPUT
- 935 - 
Example) When parameter is set to follow, the address is changed. 
- No.5043 is set to 2 (Y-axis offset is the second axis) 
- No.1020 (second axis) = 65 (Address name of Y-axis offset is 'A') 
- Bit 2 (OFN) of No.11403 is set to 1 (Address depend on parameter No.1020) 
% 
G10 P01 X_ Z_ A_ 
G10 P02 X_ Z_ A_ 
 : 
G10 P__ X_ Z_ A_ 
% 
A_: Tool compensation data (Y-axis offset). The data format is the same as for X_.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
When no Y-axis offset is provided, this item is not output. 
The other addresses are the same as for the tool compensation amount. 
NOTE 
1 The axis name that can be used as a specification address is only 'A', and 'B'. 
 If specification address 'A' or 'B' is used, the address 'V' (incremental command 
of Y-axis offset) cannot be used. 
2 When setting is the following condition, the default specification addresses 'Y', 
'E', and 'F' are used.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
'E', and 'F' are used. 
- Parameter No.1020 is set to axis name other than 'A(65)' or 'B(66)'. 
- An extended axis name is used. 
3 When bit 2 (OFN) of parameter No.11403 is set to 1, conventional offset data 
cannot be read. If conventional offset data is read, Please set bit 2 (OFN) of 
parameter No.11403 to 0. 
8.2.4 Inputting and Outputting Pitch Error Compensation Data 
8.2.4.1 Inputting pitch error compensation data


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Pitch error compensation data are loaded into the memory of the CNC from an external device. The input 
format is the same as the output format. When a pitch error compensation data is loaded which has the 
corresponding data number as a pitch error compensation data already registered in the memory, the 
loaded data replaces the existing data. 
Inputting pitch error compensation data (for 10.4-inch display unit) 
Procedure 
1 Make sure the input device is ready for reading.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
2 Press the function key . 
3 Press the continuous menu key until soft key [SETTING] appears. 
Press the soft key [SETTING]. 
4 Press the MDI switch on the machine operator’s panel or enter state emergency stop. 
5 Enter 1 in response to the prompt for “PARAMETER WRITE” in setting data. 
Alarm SW0100, “PARAMETER ENABLE SWITCH ON” appears. 
6 Press the function key . 
7 Press the continuous menu key until soft key [PITCH ERROR] appears. 
Press the soft key [PITCH ERROR].


key: chroma:document
string_value:
8. DATA INPUT/OUTPUT OPERATION B-64694EN/01
- 936 - 
8 Press the EDIT switch on the machine operator’s panel or enter state emergency stop. 
9 Press the soft key [(OPRT)]. 
10 Press the continuous menu key until soft key [F INPUT] appears. 
Press the soft key [F INPUT]. 
11 Type the name of the file that you want to input. 
If the input file name is omitted, default input file name “PITCH.TXT” is assumed. 
12 Press the soft key [EXEC].


key: chroma:document
string_value:
12 Press the soft key [EXEC]. 
This starts reading the pitch error compensation data, and “INPUT” blinks in the lower right part of 
the screen. When the read operation ends, the “INPUT” indication disappears. 
To cancel the input of the pitch error compensation data, press the soft key [CAN]. 
13 Press the function key . 
14 Press the soft key [SETTING]. 
15 Press the MDI switch on the machine operator’s panel or enter state emergency stop.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
16 Enter 0 in response to the prompt for “PARAMETER WRITE” in setting data. 
17 Turn the power of the CNC on again. 
Inputting pitch error compensation data (for 15/19-inch display unit) 
Procedure 
1 Make sure the input device is ready for reading. 
2 Press the function key . 
3 Press the vertical soft key [NEXT PAGE] until vertical soft key [SETTING] appears. 
Press the vertical soft key [SETTING]. 
4 Press the MDI switch on the machine operator’s panel or enter state emergency stop.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
5 Enter 1 in response to the prompt for “PARAMETER WRITE” in setting data. 
Alarm SW0100, “PARAMETER ENABLE SWITCH ON” appears. 
6 Press the function key . 
7 Press the vertical soft key [NEXT PAGE] until vertical soft key [PITCH ERROR] appears. 
Press the vertical soft key [PITCH ERROR]. 
8 Press the EDIT switch on the machine operator’s panel or enter state emergency stop. 
9 Press the horizontal soft key [F INPUT]. 
10 Type the name of the file that you want to input.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
If the input file name is omitted, default input file name “PITCH.TXT” is assumed. 
11 Press the horizontal soft key [EXEC]. 
This starts reading the pitch error compensation data, and “INPUT” blinks in the lower right part of 
the screen. When the read operation ends, the “INPUT” indication disappears. 
To cancel the input of the pitch error compensation data, press the horizontal soft key [CAN]. 
12 Press the function key . 
13 Press the vertical soft key [SETTING].


key: chroma:document
string_value:
14 Press the MDI switch on the machine operator’s panel or enter state emergency stop. 
15 Enter 0 in response to the prompt for “PARAMETER WRITE” in setting data. 
16 Turn the power of the CNC on again.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64694EN/01 OPERATION 8. DATA INPUT/OUTPUT
- 937 - 
8.2.4.2 Outputting pitch error compensation data 
All pitch error compensation data are output in a defined output format from the memory of the CNC to 
an external device. 
Outputting pitch error compensation data (for 10.4-inch display unit) 
Procedure 
1 Make sure the output device is ready for output. 
2 Press the function key . 
3 Press the continuous menu key until soft key [PITCH ERROR] appears. 
Press the soft key [PITCH ERROR].


key: chroma:document
string_value:
4 Press the EDIT switch on the machine operator’s panel or enter state emergency stop. 
5 Press the soft key [(OPRT)]. 
6 Press the continuous menu key until soft key [F OUTPUT] appears. 
Press the soft key [F OUTPUT]. 
7 Type the file name that you want to output. 
If the file name is omitted, default file name “PITCH.TXT” is assumed. 
8 Press the soft key [EXEC]. 
This starts outputting the pitch error compensation data, and “OUTPUT” blinks in the lower right


key: chroma:document
string_value:
part of the screen. When the write operation ends, the “OUTPUT” indication disappears. 
To cancel the output, press the soft key [CAN]. 
Outputting pitch error compensation data (for 15/19-inch display unit) 
Procedure 
1 Make sure the output device is ready for output. 
2 Press the function key . 
3 Press the vertical soft key [NEXT PAGE] until vertical soft key [SETTING] appears. 
Press the vertical soft key [PITCH ERROR].


key: chroma:document
string_value:
4 Press the EDIT switch on the machine operator’s panel or enter state emergency stop. 
5 Press the horizontal soft key [F OUTPUT]. 
6 Type the file name that you want to output. 
If the file name is omitted, default file name “PITCH.TXT” is assumed. 
7 Press the horizontal soft key [EXEC]. 
This starts outputting the pitch error compensation data, and “OUTPUT” blinks in the lower right 
part of the screen. When the write operation ends, the “OUTPUT” indication disappears.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
To cancel the output, press the horizontal soft key [CAN]. 
8.2.4.3 Input/output format of pitch error compensation data 
Pitch error compensation data is input and output in the following input and output formats. 
 - Keywords 
The following alphabets are used as keywords. 
The numeric value following each keyword has the meaning listed below: 
Table 8.2.4.3 
Keyword Meaning of the following numeric value 
N Pitch error compensation data number + 10000


key: chroma:document
string_value:
8. DATA INPUT/OUTPUT OPERATION B-64694EN/01
- 938 - 
Keyword Meaning of the following numeric value 
L Input / Output format of pitch error compensation data (Without L : Incremental value type, L1 : 
Total value type) 
P Pitch error compensation data value 
 - Format 
The input / output format of pitch error compensation data is changed depending on bit 0 (APE) of 
parameter No.3602. 
In case of incremental value type (bit 0 (APE) of parameter No.3602 is set to 0). 
N ***** Q0 P **** ;


key: chroma:document
string_value:
N ***** Q0 P **** ; 
In case of total value type (bit 0 (APE) of parameter No.3602 is set to 1). 
N ***** Q0 L1 P **** ; 
The 5-digit numeric value following N indicates a pitch error compensation data number to which a value 
of 10000 is added. 
If the Bi-directional pitch error compensation is valid, the 5-digit numeric value following N indicates a 
pitch error compensation data number to which a value of 20000 is added. 
Q0 indicates pitch error compensation data.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
L1 indicates that the input / output format of pitch error compensation data is total value type. When the 
input / output format is incremental type (bit 0 (APE) of parameter No.3602 is set to 0), L1 is not to be 
specified. If the data with L1 is input when bit 0 (APE) of parameter No.3602 is set to 0, or the data 
without L1 is input when bit 0 (APE) of parameter No.3602 is set to 1, alarm SR1300 “ILLEGAL 
ADDRESS” is caused.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
ADDRESS” is caused. 
The numeric value following P indicates the value (integer value) of pitch error compensation data 
between -128 and 127. 
The semicolon (;) indicates the end of block (LF in the ISO code or CR in the EIA code). 
 
Example1 (bit 0 (APE) of parameter No.3602 is set to 0) 
 N10001Q0P100; 
 Pitch error compensation data number 1 
 Pitch error compensation data value 100 
Example2 (bit 0 (APE) of parameter No.3602 is set to 1) 
 N10001Q0L1P100;


key: chroma:document
string_value:
N10001Q0L1P100; 
 Pitch error compensation data number 1 
 Pitch error compensation data value 100 
 - Beginning and end of a record 
A pitch error compensation data record begins with % and ends with %. 
 
Example 
 % ; ................................................................ Beginning of record 
 N10000Q0P10; 
 N10001Q0P100; 
 : 
 N11279Q0P0; 
 % .................................................................. End of record


key: chroma:document
string_value:
When parameters and pitch error compensation data are integrated into one file, % is added to the 
beginning and end of the file.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64694EN/01 OPERATION 8. DATA INPUT/OUTPUT
- 939 - 
 WARNING 
1 Do not fail to perform reference position return manually after changing the pitch 
error compensation data or backlash compensation data. Without this, the 
machine position can deviate from the correct position. 
2 If the compensation data is changed when the input format is total value type(bit 
0 (APE) of parameter No.3602 is set to 1), power must be turned off before 
operation is continued.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
operation is continued. 
8.2.5 Inputting and Outputting Custom Macro Common Variables 
8.2.5.1 Inputting custom macro common variables 
The value of a custom macro common variable is loaded into the memory of the CNC from an external 
device. The same format used to output custom macro common variables is used for input. 
Inputting custom macro common variables (for 10.4-inch display unit) 
Procedure 
1 Make sure the input device is ready for reading. 
2 Press the function key .


key: chroma:document
string_value:
2 Press the function key . 
3 Press the continuous menu key until soft key [MACRO] appears. 
Press the soft key [MACRO]. 
4 Press the EDIT switch on the machine operator’s panel or enter state emergency stop. 
5 Press the soft key [(OPRT)]. 
6 Press the continuous menu key until soft key [F INPUT] appears. 
Press the soft key [F INPUT]. 
7 Type the name of the file that you want to input. 
If the input file name is omitted, default input file name “MACRO.TXT” is assumed.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
8 Press the soft key [EXEC]. 
This starts reading the custom macro common variables, and “INPUT” blinks in the lower right part 
of the screen. When the read operation ends, the “INPUT” indication disappears. 
To cancel the input of the custom macro common variables, press the soft key [CAN]. 
Inputting custom macro common variables (for 15/19-inch display unit) 
Procedure 
1 Make sure the input device is ready for reading. 
2 Press the function key .


key: chroma:document
string_value:
2 Press the function key . 
3 Press the vertical soft key [NEXT PAGE] until vertical soft key [MACRO] appears. 
Press the vertical soft key [MACRO]. 
4 Press the EDIT switch on the machine operator’s panel or enter state emergency stop. 
5 Press the horizontal soft key [F INPUT]. 
6 Type the name of the file that you want to input. 
If the input file name is omitted, default input file name “MACRO.TXT” is assumed. 
7 Press the horizontal soft key [EXEC].


key: chroma:document
string_value:
This starts reading the custom macro common variables, and “INPUT” blinks in the lower right part 
of the screen. When the read operation ends, the “INPUT” indication disappears. 
To cancel the input of the custom macro common variables, press the horizontal soft key [CAN].


key: chroma:document
string_value:
8. DATA INPUT/OUTPUT OPERATION B-64694EN/01
- 940 - 
Explanation 
 - Common variables 
The common variables (#500 to #549) can be input and output. 
(When the addition of common variable is enabled, values from #500 to #999 can be input and output.) 
#100 to #149 can be input when bit 3 (PV5) of parameter No.6001 is set to 1. (When the addition of 
common variable is enabled, values from #100 to #199 can be input and output.) 
8.2.5.2 Outputting custom macro common variables


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Custom macro common variables stored in the memory of the CNC can be output in a defined output 
format to an external device. 
Outputting custom macro common variables (for 10.4-inch display unit) 
Procedure 
1 Make sure the output device is ready for output. 
2 Press the function key . 
3 Press the continuous menu key until soft key [MACRO] appears. 
Press the soft key [MACRO]. 
4 Press the EDIT switch on the machine operator’s panel or enter state emergency stop.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
5 Press the soft key [(OPRT)]. 
6 Press the continuous menu key until soft key [F OUTPUT] appears. 
Press the soft key [F OUTPUT]. 
7 Type the file name that you want to output. 
If the file name is omitted, default file name “MACRO.TXT” is assumed. 
8 Press the soft key [EXEC]. 
This starts outputting the custom macro common variables, and “OUTPUT” blinks in the lower right 
part of the screen. When the write operation ends, the “OUTPUT” indication disappears.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
To cancel the output, press the soft key [CAN]. 
Outputting custom macro common variables (for 15/19-inch display unit) 
Procedure 
1 Make sure the output device is ready for output. 
2 Press the function key . 
3 Press the vertical soft key [NEXT PAGE] until vertical soft key [MACRO] appears. 
Press the vertical soft key [MACRO]. 
4 Press the EDIT switch on the machine operator’s panel or enter state emergency stop. 
5 Press the horizontal soft key [F OUTPUT].


key: chroma:document
string_value:
6 Type the file name that you want to output. 
If the file name is omitted, default file name “MACRO.TXT” is assumed. 
7 Press the horizontal soft key [EXEC]. 
This starts outputting the custom macro common variables, and “OUTPUT” blinks in the lower right 
part of the screen. When the write operation ends, the “OUTPUT” indication disappears. 
To cancel the output, press the horizontal soft key [CAN]. 
Explanation 
 - Output format 
The output format is as follows:


key: chroma:document
string_value:
The values of custom macro variables are output in a bit-image hexadecimal representation of 
double-precision floating-point type data.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64694EN/01 OPERATION 8. DATA INPUT/OUTPUT
- 941 - 
% 
G10L85P100(0000000000000000) 
G10L85P101(0000000000000000) 
G10L85P102(FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF) 
 : 
G10L85P500(4024000000000000) 
G10L85P501(4021000000000000) 
G10L85P502(0000000000000000) 
: 
SETVN500[ABC] 
SETVN501[DEF] 
SETVN502[GHI] 
 : 
M02 
% 
P_ : Macro variable number 
SETVN_ [ _ ] : Common variable name 
NOTE 
 The conventional custom macro statement program format cannot be used for 
output.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
output. 
By setting bit 0 (MCO) of parameter No.6019, it is possible to output macro variable numbers and 
variable data values as comments after normally output data. 
The output comments do not affect data input. 
 - Common variable 
The common variables (#500 to #549) can be input and output. 
(When the addition of common variable is enabled, values from #500 to #999 can be input and output.) 
#100 to #149 can be output when bit 3 (PV5) of parameter No.6001 is set to 1. (When the addition of


key: chroma:document
string_value:
common variable is enabled, values from #100 to #199 can be input and output.) 
8.2.6 Inputting and Outputting Workpiece Coordinates System 
Data 
8.2.6.1 Inputting workpiece coordinate system data 
Coordinate system variable data is loaded into the memory of the CNC from an external device. The input 
format is the same as the output format. When coordinate system variable data with a data number


key: chroma:document
string_value:
corresponding to existing coordinate system variable data registered in the memory is loaded, the loaded 
coordinate system variable data replaces the existing coordinate system variable data. 
Inputting workpiece coordinate system data (for 10.4-inch display unit) 
Procedure 
1 Make sure the input device is ready for reading. 
2 Press the function key . 
3 Press the continuous menu key until soft key [WORK] appears. 
Press the soft key [WORK].


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Press the soft key [WORK]. 
4 Press the EDIT switch on the machine operator’s panel or enter state emergency stop. 
5 Press the soft key [(OPRT)].


key: chroma:document
string_value:
8. DATA INPUT/OUTPUT OPERATION B-64694EN/01
- 942 - 
6 Press the continuous menu key until soft key [F INPUT] appears. 
Press the soft key [F INPUT]. 
7 Type the name of the file that you want to input. 
If the input file name is omitted, default input file name “EXT_WKZ.TXT” is assumed. 
8 Press the soft key [EXEC]. 
This starts reading the workpiece coordinate system data, and “INPUT” blinks in the lower right part 
of the screen. When the read operation ends, the “INPUT” indication disappears.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
To cancel the input of the workpiece coordinate system data, press the soft key [CAN]. 
Inputting workpiece coordinate system data (for 15/19-inch display unit) 
Procedure 
1 Make sure the input device is ready for reading. 
2 Press the function key . 
3 Press the vertical soft key [NEXT PAGE] until vertical soft key [WORK] appears. 
Press vertical soft key [WORK]. 
4 Press the EDIT switch on the machine operator’s panel or enter state emergency stop. 
5 Press the horizontal soft key [F INPUT].


key: chroma:document
string_value:
6 Type the name of the file that you want to input. 
If the input file name is omitted, default input file name “EXT_WKZ.TXT” is assumed. 
7 Press the horizontal soft key [EXEC]. 
This starts reading the workpiece coordinate system data, and “INPUT” blinks in the lower right part 
of the screen. When the read operation ends, the “INPUT” indication disappears. 
To cancel the input of the workpiece coordinate system data, press the horizontal soft key [CAN].


key: chroma:document
string_value:
8.2.6.2 Outputting workpiece coordinate system data 
All coordinate system variable data is output in the output format from the memory of the CNC to an 
external device. 
Outputting workpiece coordinate system data (for 10.4-inch display unit) 
Procedure 
1 Make sure the output device is ready for output. 
2 Press the function key . 
3 Press the continuous menu key until soft key [WORK] appears. 
Press the soft key [WORK].


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Press the soft key [WORK]. 
4 Press the EDIT switch on the machine operator’s panel or enter state emergency stop. 
5 Press the soft key [(OPRT)]. 
6 Press the continuous menu key until soft key [F OUTPUT] appears. 
Press the soft key [F OUTPUT]. 
7 Type the file name that you want to output. 
If the file name is omitted, default file name “EXT_WKZ.TXT” is assumed. 
8 Press the soft key [EXEC]. 
This starts outputting the workpiece coordinate system data, and “OUTPUT” blinks in the lower


key: chroma:document
string_value:
right part of the screen. When the write operation ends, the “OUTPUT” indication disappears. 
To cancel the output, press the soft key [CAN].


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64694EN/01 OPERATION 8. DATA INPUT/OUTPUT
- 943 - 
Outputting workpiece coordinate system data (for 15/19-inch display unit) 
Procedure 
1 Make sure the output device is ready for output. 
2 Press the function key . 
3 Press the vertical soft key [NEXT PAGE] until vertical soft key [WORK] appears. 
Press vertical soft key [WORK]. 
4 Press the EDIT switch on the machine operator’s panel or enter state emergency stop. 
5 Press the horizontal soft key [F OUTPUT].


key: chroma:document
string_value:
6 Type the file name that you want to output. 
If the file name is omitted, default file name “EXT_WKZ.TXT” is assumed. 
7 Press the horizontal soft key [EXEC]. 
This starts outputting the workpiece coordinate system data, and “OUTPUT” blinks in the lower 
right part of the screen. When the write operation ends, the “OUTPUT” indication disappears. 
To cancel the output, press the horizontal soft key [CAN]. 
8.2.7 Inputting and Outputting Operation History Data


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Only output operation is permitted on operation history data. 
The output data is in text format. So, to reference the output data you must use an application that can 
handle text files on the personal computer. 
8.2.7.1 Outputting operation history data 
All operation history data is output in the output format form the memory of the CNC to an external 
device. 
Outputting operation history data (for 10.4-inch display unit) 
Procedure 
1 Make sure the output device is ready for output.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
2 Press the function key . 
3 Press the continuous menu key until soft key [OPERAT HISTRY] appears. 
Press the soft key [OPERAT HISTRY]. 
4 Press the EDIT switch on the machine operator’s panel or enter state emergency stop. 
5 Press the soft key [(OPRT)]. 
6 Press the soft key [F OUTPUT]. 
7 Type the file name that you want to output. 
If the file name is omitted, default file name “OPRT_HIS.TXT” is assumed. 
8 Press the soft key [EXEC].


key: chroma:document
string_value:
8 Press the soft key [EXEC]. 
This starts outputting the operation history data, and “OUTPUT” blinks in the lower right part of the 
screen. When the write operation ends, the “OUTPUT” indication disappears. 
To cancel the output, press the soft key [CAN]. 
Outputting operation history data (for 15/19-inch display unit) 
Procedure 
1 Make sure the output device is ready for output. 
2 Press the function key .


key: chroma:document
string_value:
2 Press the function key . 
3 Press the vertical soft key [NEXT PAGE] until vertical soft key [OPERAT HISTRY] appears. 
Press the vertical soft key [OPERAT HISTRY].


key: chroma:document
string_value:
8. DATA INPUT/OUTPUT OPERATION B-64694EN/01
- 944 - 
4 Press the EDIT switch on the machine operator’s panel or enter state emergency stop. 
5 Press the horizontal soft key [F OUTPUT]. 
6 Type the file name that you want to output. 
If the file name is omitted, default file name “OPRT_HIS.TXT” is assumed. 
7 Press the horizontal soft key [EXEC]. 
This starts outputting the operation history data, and “OUTPUT” blinks in the lower right part of the


key: chroma:document
string_value:
screen. When the write operation ends, the “OUTPUT” indication disappears. 
To cancel the output, press the horizontal soft key [CAN]. 
8.2.7.2 Inputting operation history signal selection data 
Operation history signal selection data is input from an external input/output device to the memory of the 
CNC. The input format is the same as the format in which operation history signal selection data is 
output. 
Inputting operation history signal section data (for10.4-inch display unit) 
Procedure


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Procedure 
1 Make sure the input device is ready for reading. 
2 Press the function key . 
3 Press the continuous menu key until soft key [OPERAT HISTRY] appears. 
Press the soft key [OPERAT HISTRY]. 
4 Press the soft key [SIGNAL SELECT]. 
5 Press the EDIT switch on the machine operator’s panel or enter state emergency stop. 
6 Press the soft key [(OPRT)]. 
7 Press the soft key [F INPUT]. 
8 Type the name of the file that you want to input.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
If the input file name is omitted, default input file name “OHIS_SIG.TXT” is assumed. 
9 Press the soft key [EXEC]. 
This starts reading the operation history signal selection data, and “INPUT” blinks in the lower right 
part of the screen. When the read operation ends, the “INPUT” indication disappears. 
To cancel the input of the operation history signal selection data, press the soft key [CAN]. 
Inputting operation history signal section data (for 15/19-inch display unit) 
Procedure


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Procedure 
1 Make sure the input device is ready for reading. 
2 Press the function key . 
3 Press the vertical soft key [NEXT PAGE] until vertical soft key [OPERAT HISTRY] appears. 
Press the vertical soft key [OPERAT HISTRY]. 
4 Press the vertical soft key [SIGNAL SELECT]. 
5 Press the EDIT switch on the machine operator’s panel or enter state emergency stop. 
6 Press the horizontal soft key [F INPUT]. 
7 Type the name of the file that you want to input.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
If the input file name is omitted, default input file name “OHIS_SIG.TXT” is assumed. 
8 Press the horizontal soft key [EXEC]. 
This starts reading the operation history signal selection data, and “INPUT” blinks in the lower right 
part of the screen. When the read operation ends, the “INPUT” indication disappears. 
To cancel the input of the operation history signal selection data, press the horizontal soft key 
[CAN].


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64694EN/01 OPERATION 8. DATA INPUT/OUTPUT
- 945 - 
8.2.7.3 Outputting operation history signal section data 
Operation history signal selection data is output in the output format form the memory of the CNC to an 
external device. 
Outputting operation history signal section data (for 10.4-inch display unit) 
Procedure 
1 Make sure the output device is ready for output. 
2 Press the function key . 
3 Press the continuous menu key until soft key [OPERAT HISTRY] appears.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Press the soft key [OPERAT HISTRY]. 
4 Press the soft key [SIGNAL SELECT]. 
4 Press the EDIT switch on the machine operator’s panel or enter state emergency stop. 
6 Press the soft key [(OPRT)]. 
7 Press the soft key [F OUTPUT]. 
8 Type the file name that you want to output. 
If the file name is omitted, default file name “OHIS_SIG.TXT” is assumed. 
9 Press the soft key [EXEC]. 
This starts outputting the operation history signal selection data, and “OUTPUT” blinks in the lower


key: chroma:document
string_value:
right part of the screen. When the write operation ends, the “OUTPUT” indication disappears. 
To cancel the output, press the soft key [CAN]. 
Outputting operation history signal section data (for 15/19-inch display unit) 
Procedure 
1 Make sure the output device is ready for output. 
2 Press the function key . 
3 Press the vertical soft key [NEXT PAGE] until vertical soft key [OPERAT HISTRY] appears. 
Press the vertical soft key [OPERAT HISTRY]. 
4 Press the vertical soft key [SIGNAL SELECT].


key: chroma:document
string_value:
4 Press the EDIT switch on the machine operator’s panel or enter state emergency stop. 
6 Press the horizontal soft key [F OUTPUT]. 
7 Type the file name that you want to output. 
If the file name is omitted, default file name “OHIS_SIG.TXT” is assumed. 
8 Press the horizontal soft key [EXEC]. 
This starts outputting the operation history signal selection data, and “OUTPUT” blinks in the lower 
right part of the screen. When the write operation ends, the “OUTPUT” indication disappears.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
To cancel the output, press the horizontal soft key [CAN]. 
8.2.7.4 Input/output format of operation history signal selection data 
Operation history signal selection data is input and output in the following input and output formats. 
 - Keywords 
The following alphabets are used as keywords. 
The numeric value following each keyword has the meaning listed below: 
Table 8.2.7.4 
Keyword Meaning of the following numeric value 
N Data number 
L PMC number


key: chroma:document
string_value:
8. DATA INPUT/OUTPUT OPERATION B-64694EN/01
- 946 - 
Keyword Meaning of the following numeric value 
X,Y,G,F,P Signal address 
Q Bit state 
 - Format 
Operation history signal selection data is output in the following format:
N ** L ** X,Y,G,F,P ***** Q ******** ; 
The numeric value following the N represents an operation history signal selection data number. 
The numeric value following the L represents a PMC number in a multipath PMC.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
The numeric value following the X, Y, G, and F represents the signal address to be recorded in operation 
history. Here, P is a special keyword indicating that none is set. 
The numeric value following the Q represents the bit position of the signal to be recorded in operation 
history. 
The semicolon (;) indicates the end of block (LF in the ISO code or CR in the EIA code).
 
Example 1 
 N01 L01 G00043 Q00100111; 
 As operation history signal selection data number 1, bits 0, 1, 2, and 5 of


key: chroma:document
string_value:
G0043 of the first PMC are set. 
Example 2 
 N02 L00 P00000 Q00000000; 
 For operation history signal selection data number 2, no signal selection data 
is set. 
 - Beginning and end of a record 
A operation history signal selection data record begins with % and ends with %. 
 
Example 
% ; ...................................................... Beginning of record 
N01 L01 G00043 Q00100111; 
N02 L01 F00001 Q00000001; 
 : 
N60 L00 P00000 Q00000000;


key: chroma:document
string_value:
N60 L00 P00000 Q00000000; 
% ........................................................ End of record
8.2.8 Inputting and Outputting Tool Management Data 
NOTE 
1 For multi-path systems, place all paths in the EDIT mode before performing input 
and output operations. 
2 The format used is the same as the registration format of the G10 format. 
8.2.8.1 Inputting tool management data 
Tool management data is loaded into the memory of the CNC from an external device. The input format


key: chroma:document
string_value:
is the same as the output format. When tool management data with a data number corresponding to 
existing tool management data registered in the memory is loaded, the loaded tool management data 
replaces the existing tool management data.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64694EN/01 OPERATION 8. DATA INPUT/OUTPUT
- 947 - 
Inputting tool management data (for 10.4-inch display unit) 
Procedure 
1 Make sure the input device is ready for reading. 
2 Press the function key to display the tool management screen or magazine screen. 
3 Press the EDIT switch on the machine operator’s panel. 
4 Press the soft key [(OPRT)]. 
5 Press the soft key [F INPUT]. 
6 Press the soft key [TOOL]. 
7 Type the name of the file that you want to input.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
If the input file name is omitted, default input file name “TOOL_MNG.TXT” is assumed. 
8 Press the soft key [EXEC]. 
This starts reading the tool management data, and “INPUT” blinks in the lower right part of the 
screen. When the read operation ends, the “INPUT” indication disappears. 
To cancel the input of the tool management data, press the soft key [CAN]. 
NOTE 
1 When using oversize tool support of the tool management function, keep the 
following in mind.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
following in mind. 
- If a target tool is registered in a cartridge and interferes with other tools in 
registration or modification of tool geometry data of the tool management 
data, alarm PS5360, ”TOOL INTERFERENCE CHECK ERROR” is 
issued. (The data is not input.) 
- When restoring backup data in the state where all data related to the tool 
management function in the NC is cleared, restore tool geometry data, 
tool management data, and cartridge management table data in this 
order.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
order. 
2 When bit 4 (OVI) of parameter No.13206 to 1, tool management data, tool offset 
data, and tool geometry size data can be input as one file. 
Inputting tool management data (for 15/19-inch display unit) 
Procedure 
1 Make sure the input device is ready for reading. 
2 Press the function key . 
3 Press the vertical soft key [NEXT PAGE] until vertical soft key [TOOL MANAGER] appears. 
Press the vertical soft key [TOOL MANAGER]. 
4 Press the vertical soft key [MAGAZINE] or [TOOL].


key: chroma:document
string_value:
5 Press the EDIT switch on the machine operator’s panel. 
6 Press the horizontal soft key [F INPUT]. 
7 Press the horizontal soft key [TOOL]. 
8 Type the name of the file that you want to input. 
If the input file name is omitted, default input file name “TOOL_MNG.TXT” is assumed. 
9 Press the horizontal soft key [EXEC]. 
This starts reading the tool management data, and “INPUT” blinks in the lower right part of the 
screen. When the read operation ends, the “INPUT” indication disappears.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
8. DATA INPUT/OUTPUT OPERATION B-64694EN/01
- 948 - 
NOTE 
1 When using oversize tool support of the tool management function, keep the 
following in mind. 
- If a target tool is registered in a cartridge and interferes with other tools in 
registration or modification of tool geometry data of the tool management 
data, alarm PS5360, ”TOOL INTERFERENCE CHECK ERROR” is 
issued. (The data is not input.) 
- When restoring backup data in the state where all data related to the tool


key: chroma:document
string_value:
management function in the NC is cleared, restore tool geometry data, 
tool management data, and cartridge management table data in this 
order. 
2 When bit 4 (OVI) of parameter No.13206 to 1, tool management data, tool offset 
data, and tool geometry size data can be input as one file. 
8.2.8.2 Outputting tool management data 
All tool management data is output in the output format from the memory of the CNC to an external 
device. 
Outputting tool management data (for 10.4-inch display unit)


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Procedure 
1 Make sure the output device is ready for output. 
2 Press the function key to display the tool management screen or magazine screen. 
3 Press the EDIT switch on the machine operator’s panel. 
4 Press the soft key [(OPRT)]. 
5 Press the soft key [F OUTPUT]. 
6 Press the soft key [TOOL]. 
7 Type the file name that you want to output. 
If the output file name is omitted, default output file name “TOOL_MNG.TXT” is assumed. 
8 Press the soft key [EXEC].


key: chroma:document
string_value:
8 Press the soft key [EXEC]. 
This starts outputting the tool management data, and “OUTPUT” blinks in the lower right part of the 
screen. When the write operation ends, the “OUTPUT” indication disappears. 
To cancel the output, press the soft key [CAN]. 
NOTE 
 When bit 4 (OVI) of parameter No.13206 to 1, tool management data, tool offset 
data, and tool geometry size data can be output as one file. The format of tool 
offset data output using this function cannot be used with the programmable


key: chroma:document
string_value:
data input function. 
Outputting tool management data (for 15/19-inch display unit) 
Procedure 
1 Make sure the output device is ready for output. 
2 Press the function key . 
3 Press the vertical soft key [NEXT PAGE] until vertical soft key [TOOL MANAGER] appears. 
Press the vertical soft key [TOOL MANAGER]. 
4 Press the vertical soft key [MAGAZINE] or [TOOL]. 
5 Press the EDIT switch on the machine operator’s panel. 
6 Press the horizontal soft key [F OUTPUT].


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64694EN/01 OPERATION 8. DATA INPUT/OUTPUT
- 949 - 
7 Press the horizontal soft key [TOOL]. 
8 Type the file name that you want to output. 
If the output file name is omitted, default output file name “TOOL_MNG.TXT” is assumed. 
9 Press the horizontal soft key [EXEC]. 
This starts outputting the tool management data, and “OUTPUT” blinks in the lower right part of the 
screen. When the write operation ends, the “OUTPUT” indication disappears.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
To cancel the output, press the horizontal soft key [CAN]. 
NOTE 
 When bit 4 (OVI) of parameter No.13206 to 1, tool management data, tool offset 
data, and tool geometry size data can be output as one file. The format of tool 
offset data output using this function cannot be used with the programmable 
data input function. 
8.2.8.3 Inputting magazine data 
Magazine data is loaded into the memory of the CNC from an external device. The input format is the


key: chroma:document
string_value:
same as the output format. When magazine data with a data number corresponding to existing magazine 
data registered in the memory is loaded, the loaded magazine data replaces the existing magazine data. 
Inputting magazine data (for 10.4-inch display unit) 
Procedure 
1 Make sure the input device is ready for reading. 
2 Press the function key to display the tool management screen or magazine screen. 
3 Press the EDIT switch on the machine operator’s panel. 
4 Press the soft key [(OPRT)].


key: chroma:document
string_value:
5 Press the soft key [F INPUT]. 
6 Press the soft key [MAGAZINE]. 
7 Type the name of the file that you want to input. 
If the input file name is omitted, default input file name “MAGAZINE.TXT” is assumed. 
8 Press the soft key [EXEC]. 
This starts reading the magazine data, and “INPUT” blinks in the lower right part of the screen. 
When the read operation ends, the “INPUT” indication disappears. 
To cancel the input of the magazine data, press the soft key [CAN]. 
NOTE


key: chroma:document
string_value:
NOTE 
 When using oversize tool support of the tool management function, keep the 
following in mind. 
- If a tool interferes with other tools in registration in or modification to the 
cartridge management table, alarm PS5360, ”TOOL INTERFERENCE 
CHECK ERROR” is issued. (The data is not input.) 
- When restoring backup data in the state where all data related to the tool 
management function in the NC is cleared, restore tool geometry data,


key: chroma:document
string_value:
8. DATA INPUT/OUTPUT OPERATION B-64694EN/01
- 950 - 
Inputting magazine data (for 15/19-inch display unit) 
Procedure 
1 Make sure the input device is ready for reading. 
2 Press the function key . 
3 Press the vertical soft key [NEXT PAGE] until vertical soft key [TOOL MANAGER] appears. 
Press the vertical soft key [TOOL MANAGER]. 
4 Press the vertical soft key [MAGAZINE] or [TOOL]. 
5 Press the EDIT switch on the machine operator’s panel. 
6 Press the horizontal soft key [F INPUT].


key: chroma:document
string_value:
7 Press the horizontal soft key [MAGAZINE]. 
8 Type the name of the file that you want to input. 
If the input file name is omitted, default input file name “MAGAZINE.TXT” is assumed. 
9 Press the horizontal soft key [EXEC]. 
This starts reading the magazine data, and “INPUT” blinks in the lower right part of the screen. 
When the read operation ends, the “INPUT” indication disappears. 
To cancel the input of the magazine data, press the horizontal soft key [CAN]. 
NOTE


key: chroma:document
string_value:
tool management data, and cartridge management table data in this 
order. 
8.2.8.4 Outputting magazine data 
All magazine data is output in the output format from the memory of the CNC to an external device. 
Outputting magazine data (for 10.4-inch display unit) 
Procedure 
1 Make sure the output device is ready for output. 
2 Press the function key to display the tool management screen or magazine screen. 
3 Press the EDIT switch on the machine operator’s panel. 
4 Press the soft key [(OPRT)].


key: chroma:document
string_value:
5 Press the soft key [F OUTPUT]. 
6 Press the soft key [MAGAZINE]. 
7 Type the file name that you want to output. 
If the file name is omitted, default file name “MAGAZINE.TXT” is assumed. 
8 Press the soft key [EXEC]. 
This starts outputting the magazine data, and “OUTPUT” blinks in the lower right part of the screen. 
When the write operation ends, the “OUTPUT” indication disappears. 
To cancel the output, press the soft key [CAN].


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64694EN/01 OPERATION 8. DATA INPUT/OUTPUT
- 951 - 
Outputting magazine data (for 15/19-inch display unit) 
Procedure 
1 Make sure the output device is ready for output. 
2 Press the function key . 
3 Press the vertical soft key [NEXT PAGE] until vertical soft key [TOOL MANAGER] appears. 
Press the vertical soft key [TOOL MANAGER]. 
4 Press the vertical soft key [MAGAZINE] or [TOOL]. 
5 Press the EDIT switch on the machine operator’s panel. 
6 Press the horizontal soft key [F OUTPUT].


key: chroma:document
string_value:
7 Press the horizontal soft key [MAGAZINE]. 
8 Type the file name that you want to output. 
If the file name is omitted, default file name “MAGAZINE.TXT” is assumed. 
9 Press the horizontal soft key [EXEC]. 
This starts outputting the magazine data, and “OUTPUT” blinks in the lower right part of the screen. 
When the write operation ends, the “OUTPUT” indication disappears. 
To cancel the output, press the horizontal soft key [CAN]. 
8.2.8.5 Inputting tool life status name data


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Tool life status name data is loaded into the memory of the CNC from an external device. The input 
format is the same as the output format. When tool life status name data with a data number 
corresponding to existing tool life status name data registered in the memory is loaded, the loaded tool 
life status name data replaces the existing tool life status name data. 
Inputting tool life status name data (for 10.4-inch display unit) 
Procedure 
1 Make sure the input device is ready for reading.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
2 Press the function key to display the tool management screen or magazine screen. 
3 Press the EDIT switch on the machine operator’s panel. 
4 Press the soft key [(OPRT)]. 
5 Press the soft key [F INPUT]. 
6 Press the soft key [STATUS]. 
7 Type the name of the file that you want to input. 
If the input file name is omitted, default input file name “STATUS.TXT” is assumed. 
8 Press the soft key [EXEC].


key: chroma:document
string_value:
8 Press the soft key [EXEC]. 
This starts reading the tool life status name data, and “INPUT” blinks in the lower right part of the 
screen. When the read operation ends, the “INPUT” indication disappears. 
To cancel the input of the tool life status name data, press the soft key [CAN]. 
Inputting tool life status name data (for 15/19-inch display unit) 
Procedure 
1 Make sure the input device is ready for reading. 
2 Press the function key .


key: chroma:document
string_value:
2 Press the function key . 
3 Press the vertical soft key [NEXT PAGE] until vertical soft key [TOOL MANAGER] appears. 
Press the vertical soft key [TOOL MANAGER]. 
4 Press the vertical soft key [MAGAZINE] or [TOOL]. 
5 Press the EDIT switch on the machine operator’s panel. 
6 Press the horizontal soft key [F INPUT]. 
7 Press the horizontal soft key [STATUS].


key: chroma:document
string_value:
8. DATA INPUT/OUTPUT OPERATION B-64694EN/01
- 952 - 
8 Type the name of the file that you want to input. 
If the input file name is omitted, default input file name “STATUS.TXT” is assumed. 
9 Press the horizontal soft key [EXEC]. 
This starts reading the tool life status name data, and “INPUT” blinks in the lower right part of the 
screen. When the read operation ends, the “INPUT” indication disappears. 
To cancel the input of the tool life status name data, press the horizontal soft key [CAN].


key: chroma:document
string_value:
8.2.8.6 Outputting tool life status name data 
All tool life status name data is output in the output format from the memory of the CNC to an external 
device. 
Outputting tool life status name data (for 10.4-inch display unit) 
Procedure 
1 Make sure the output device is ready for output. 
2 Press the function key to display the tool management screen or magazine screen. 
3 Press the EDIT switch on the machine operator’s panel. 
4 Press the soft key [(OPRT)]. 
5 Press the soft key [F OUTPUT].


key: chroma:document
string_value:
6 Press the soft key [STATUS]. 
7 Type the file name that you want to output. 
If the file name is omitted, default file name “STATUS.TXT” is assumed. 
8 Press the soft key [EXEC]. 
This starts outputting the tool life status name data, and “OUTPUT” blinks in the lower right part of 
the screen. When the write operation ends, the “OUTPUT” indication disappears. 
To cancel the output, press the soft key [CAN]. 
Outputting tool life status name data (for 15/19-inch display unit) 
Procedure


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Procedure 
1 Make sure the output device is ready for output. 
2 Press the function key . 
3 Press the vertical soft key [NEXT PAGE] until vertical soft key [TOOL MANAGER] appears. 
Press the vertical soft key [TOOL MANAGER]. 
4 Press the vertical soft key [MAGAZINE] or [TOOL]. 
5 Press the EDIT switch on the machine operator’s panel. 
6 Press the horizontal soft key [F OUTPUT]. 
7 Press the horizontal soft key [STATUS]. 
8 Type the file name that you want to output.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
If the file name is omitted, default file name “STATUS.TXT” is assumed. 
9 Press the horizontal soft key [EXEC]. 
This starts outputting the tool life status name data, and “OUTPUT” blinks in the lower right part of 
the screen. When the write operation ends, the “OUTPUT” indication disappears. 
To cancel the output, press the horizontal soft key [CAN]. 
8.2.8.7 Inputting name data of customize data 
Name data of customize data is loaded into the memory of the CNC from an external device. The input


key: chroma:document
string_value:
format is the same as the output format. When name data of customize data with a data number 
corresponding to existing name data of customize data registered in the memory is loaded, the loaded 
name data of customize data replaces the existing data.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64694EN/01 OPERATION 8. DATA INPUT/OUTPUT
- 953 - 
Inputting name data of customize data (for 10.4-inch display unit) 
Procedure 
1 Make sure the input device is ready for reading. 
2 Press the function key to display the tool management screen or magazine screen. 
3 Press the EDIT switch on the machine operator’s panel. 
4 Press the soft key [(OPRT)]. 
5 Press the soft key [F INPUT]. 
6 Press the soft key [CUSTOM]. 
7 Type the name of the file that you want to input.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
If the input file name is omitted, default input file name “CUSTOMIZ.TXT” is assumed. 
8 Press the soft key [EXEC]. 
This starts reading the name data of customize data, and “INPUT” blinks in the lower right part of 
the screen. When the read operation ends, the “INPUT” indication disappears. 
To cancel the input of the name data of customize data, press the soft key [CAN]. 
Inputting name data of customize data (for 15/19-inch display unit) 
Procedure


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Procedure 
1 Make sure the input device is ready for reading. 
2 Press the function key . 
3 Press the vertical soft key [NEXT PAGE] until vertical soft key [TOOL MANAGER] appears. 
Press the vertical soft key [TOOL MANAGER]. 
4 Press the vertical soft key [MAGAZINE] or [TOOL]. 
5 Press the EDIT switch on the machine operator’s panel. 
6 Press the horizontal soft key [F INPUT]. 
7 Press the horizontal soft key [CUSTOM]. 
8 Type the name of the file that you want to input.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
If the input file name is omitted, default input file name “CUSTOMIZ.TXT” is assumed. 
9 Press the horizontal soft key [EXEC]. 
This starts reading the name data of customize data, and “INPUT” blinks in the lower right part of 
the screen. When the read operation ends, the “INPUT” indication disappears. 
To cancel the input of the name data of customize data, press the horizontal soft key [CAN]. 
8.2.8.8 Outputting name data of customize data


key: chroma:document
string_value:
All name data of customize data is output in the output format from the memory of the CNC to an 
external device. 
Outputting name data of customize data (for 10.4-inch display unit) 
Procedure 
1 Make sure the output device is ready for output. 
2 Press the function key to display the tool management screen or magazine screen. 
3 Press the EDIT switch on the machine operator’s panel. 
4 Press the soft key [(OPRT)]. 
5 Press the soft key [F OUTPUT]. 
6 Press the soft key [CUSTOM].


key: chroma:document
string_value:
7 Type the file name that you want to output. 
If the file name is omitted, default file name “CUSTOMIZ.TXT” is assumed. 
8 Press the soft key [EXEC]. 
This starts outputting the name data of customize data, and “OUTPUT” blinks in the lower right part 
of the screen. When the write operation ends, the “OUTPUT” indication disappears. 
To cancel the output, press the soft key [CAN].


key: chroma:document
string_value:
8. DATA INPUT/OUTPUT OPERATION B-64694EN/01
- 954 - 
Outputting name data of customize data (for 15/19-inch display unit) 
Procedure 
1 Make sure the output device is ready for output. 
2 Press the function key . 
3 Press the vertical soft key [NEXT PAGE] until vertical soft key [TOOL MANAGER] appears. 
Press the vertical soft key [TOOL MANAGER]. 
4 Press the vertical soft key [MAGAZINE] or [TOOL]. 
5 Press the EDIT switch on the machine operator’s panel.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
6 Press the horizontal soft key [F OUTPUT]. 
7 Press the horizontal soft key [CUSTOM]. 
8 Type the file name that you want to output. 
If the file name is omitted, default file name “CUSTOMIZ.TXT” is assumed. 
9 Press the horizontal soft key [EXEC]. 
This starts outputting the name data of customize data, and “OUTPUT” blinks in the lower right part 
of the screen. When the write operation ends, the “OUTPUT” indication disappears. 
To cancel the output, press the horizontal soft key [CAN].


key: chroma:document
string_value:
8.2.8.9 Inputting customize data displayed as tool management data 
Customize data displayed as tool management data is loaded into the memory of the CNC from an 
external device. The input format is the same as the output format. When customize data displayed as tool 
management data with a data number corresponding to existing customize data displayed as tool 
management data registered in the memory is loaded, the loaded customize data replaces the existing 
data.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
data. 
Inputting customize data displayed as tool management data (for10.4-inch display 
unit) 
Procedure 
1 Make sure the input device is ready for reading. 
2 Press the function key to display the tool management screen, magazine screen, or each tool 
data screen. 
3 Press the EDIT switch on the machine operator’s panel. 
4 Press the soft key [(OPRT)]. 
5 Press the soft key [F INPUT]. 
6 Press the soft key [DSP-LAYOUT]. 
7 Type the name of the file that you want to input.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
If the input file name is omitted, default input file name “DISPCSTM.TXT” is assumed. 
8 Press the soft key [EXEC]. 
This starts reading the customize data displayed as tool management data, and “INPUT” blinks in 
the lower right part of the screen. When the read operation ends, the “INPUT” indication disappears. 
To cancel the input of the customize data displayed as tool management data, press the soft key 
[CAN]. 
Inputting customize data displayed as tool management data (for 15/19-inch display


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64694EN/01 OPERATION 8. DATA INPUT/OUTPUT
- 955 - 
3 Press the vertical soft key [NEXT PAGE] until vertical soft key [TOOL MANAGER] appears. 
Press the vertical soft key [TOOL MANAGER]. 
4 Press the vertical soft key [MAGAZINE], [EACH TOOL], or [TOOL]. 
5 Press the EDIT switch on the machine operator’s panel. 
6 Press the horizontal soft key [F INPUT]. 
7 Press the horizontal soft key [DSP-LAYOUT]. 
8 Type the name of the file that you want to input.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
If the input file name is omitted, default input file name “DISPCSTM.TXT” is assumed. 
9 Press the horizontal soft key [EXEC]. 
This starts reading the customize data displayed as tool management data, and “INPUT” blinks in 
the lower right part of the screen. When the read operation ends, the “INPUT” indication disappears. 
To cancel the input of the customize data displayed as tool management data, press the horizontal 
soft key [CAN].


key: chroma:document
string_value:
soft key [CAN]. 
8.2.8.10 Outputting customize data displayed as tool management 
data 
Customize data displayed as tool management data is output from the memory of the CNC to an external 
device in the output format. 
Outputting customize data displayed as tool management data (for 10.4-inch display 
unit) 
Procedure 
1 Make sure the output device is ready for output. 
2 Press the function key to display the tool management screen, magazine screen, or each tool 
data screen.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
data screen. 
3 Press the EDIT switch on the machine operator’s panel. 
4 Press the soft key [(OPRT)]. 
5 Press the soft key [F OUTPUT]. 
6 Press the soft key [DSP-LAYOUT]. 
7 Type the file name that you want to output. 
If the file name is omitted, default file name “DISPCSTM.TXT” is assumed. 
8 Press the soft key [EXEC]. 
This starts outputting the customize data displayed as tool management data, and “OUTPUT” blinks


key: chroma:document
string_value:
in the lower right part of the screen. When the write operation ends, the “OUTPUT” indication 
disappears. 
To cancel the output, press the soft key [CAN]. 
Outputting customize data displayed as tool management data (for 15/19-inch 
display unit) 
Procedure 
1 Make sure the output device is ready for output. 
2 Press the function key . 
3 Press the vertical soft key [NEXT PAGE] until vertical soft key [TOOL MANAGER] appears. 
Press the vertical soft key [TOOL MANAGER].


key: chroma:document
string_value:
4 Press the vertical soft key [MAGAZINE], [EACH TOOL], or [TOOL]. 
5 Press the EDIT switch on the machine operator’s panel. 
6 Press the horizontal soft key [F OUTPUT]. 
7 Press the horizontal soft key [DSP-LAYOUT].


key: chroma:document
string_value:
8. DATA INPUT/OUTPUT OPERATION B-64694EN/01
- 956 - 
8 Type the file name that you want to output. 
If the file name is omitted, default file name “DISPCSTM.TXT” is assumed. 
9 Press the horizontal soft key [EXEC]. 
This starts outputting the customize data displayed as tool management data, and “OUTPUT” blinks 
in the lower right part of the screen. When the write operation ends, the “OUTPUT” indication 
disappears. 
To cancel the output, press the horizontal soft key [CAN].


key: chroma:document
string_value:
8.2.8.11 Inputting spindle waiting position name data 
Spindle waiting position name data is loaded into the memory of the CNC from an external device. The 
input format is the same as the output format. When spindle waiting position name data with a data 
number corresponding to existing spindle waiting position name data registered in the memory is loaded, 
the loaded spindle waiting position name data replaces the existing data.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Inputting spindle waiting position name data (for 10.4-inch display unit) 
Procedure 
1 Make sure the input device is ready for reading. 
2 Press the function key to display the tool management screen, magazine screen, or each tool 
data screen. 
3 Press the EDIT switch on the machine operator’s panel. 
4 Press the soft key [(OPRT)]. 
5 Press the soft key [F INPUT]. 
6 Press the soft key [SPWP-NAME]. 
7 Type the name of the file that you want to input.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
If the input file name is omitted, default input file name “POSNAME.TXT” is assumed. 
8 Press the soft key [EXEC]. 
This starts reading the spindle waiting position name data, and “INPUT” blinks in the lower right 
part of the screen. When the read operation ends, the “INPUT” indication disappears. 
To cancel the input of the spindle waiting position name data, press the soft key [CAN]. 
Inputting spindle waiting position name data (for 15/19-inch display unit) 
Procedure


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Procedure 
1 Make sure the input device is ready for reading. 
2 Press the function key . 
3 Press the vertical soft key [NEXT PAGE] until vertical soft key [TOOL MANAGER] appears. 
Press the vertical soft key [TOOL MANAGER]. 
4 Press the vertical soft key [MAGAZINE], [EACH TOOL], or [TOOL]. 
5 Press the EDIT switch on the machine operator’s panel. 
6 Press the horizontal soft key [F INPUT]. 
7 Press the horizontal soft key [SPWP-NAME]. 
8 Type the name of the file that you want to input.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
If the input file name is omitted, default input file name “POSNAME.TXT” is assumed. 
9 Press the horizontal soft key [EXEC]. 
This starts reading the spindle waiting position name data, and “INPUT” blinks in the lower right 
part of the screen. When the read operation ends, the “INPUT” indication disappears. 
To cancel the input of the spindle waiting position name data, press the horizontal soft key [CAN].


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64694EN/01 OPERATION 8. DATA INPUT/OUTPUT
- 957 - 
8.2.8.12 Outputting spindle waiting position name data 
Spindle waiting position name data is output from the memory of the CNC to an external device in the 
output format. 
Outputting spindle waiting position name data (for 10.4-inch display unit) 
Procedure 
1 Make sure the output device is ready for output. 
2 Press the function key to display the tool management screen, magazine screen, or each tool 
data screen.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
data screen. 
3 Press the EDIT switch on the machine operator’s panel. 
4 Press the soft key [(OPRT)]. 
5 Press the soft key [F OUTPUT]. 
6 Press the soft key [SPWP-NAME]. 
7 Type the file name that you want to output. 
If the file name is omitted, default file name “POSNAME.TXT” is assumed. 
8 Press the soft key [EXEC]. 
This starts outputting the spindle waiting position name data display, and “OUTPUT” blinks in the


key: chroma:document
string_value:
lower right part of the screen. When the write operation ends, the “OUTPUT” indication disappears. 
To cancel the output, press the soft key [CAN]. 
Outputting spindle waiting position name data (for 15/19-inch display unit) 
Procedure 
1 Make sure the output device is ready for output. 
2 Press the function key . 
3 Press the vertical soft key [NEXT PAGE] until vertical soft key [TOOL MANAGER] appears. 
Press the vertical soft key [TOOL MANAGER].


key: chroma:document
string_value:
4 Press the vertical soft key [MAGAZINE], [EACH TOOL], or [TOOL]. 
5 Press the EDIT switch on the machine operator’s panel. 
6 Press the horizontal soft key [F OUTPUT]. 
7 Press the horizontal soft key [SPWP-NAME]. 
8 Type the file name that you want to output. 
If the file name is omitted, default file name “POSNAME.TXT” is assumed. 
9 Press the horizontal soft key [EXEC]. 
This starts outputting the spindle waiting position name data display, and “OUTPUT” blinks in the


key: chroma:document
string_value:
lower right part of the screen. When the write operation ends, the “OUTPUT” indication disappears. 
To cancel the output, press the horizontal soft key [CAN]. 
8.2.8.13 Inputting decimal point position data of customize data 
Decimal point position data of customize data is loaded into the memory of the CNC from an external 
device. The input format is the same as the output format. When decimal point position data of customize


key: chroma:document
string_value:
data with a data number corresponding to existing decimal point position data of customize data 
registered in the memory is loaded, the loaded decimal point position data of customize data replaces the 
existing data.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
8. DATA INPUT/OUTPUT OPERATION B-64694EN/01
- 958 - 
Inputting decimal point position data of customize data (for 10.4-inch display unit) 
Procedure 
1 Make sure the input device is ready for reading. 
2 Press the function key to display the tool management screen, magazine screen, or each tool 
data screen. 
3 Press the EDIT switch on the machine operator’s panel. 
4 Press the soft key [(OPRT)]. 
5 Press the soft key [F INPUT]. 
6 Press the soft key [CSTM-DPOINT].


key: chroma:document
string_value:
7 Type the name of the file that you want to input. 
If the input file name is omitted, default input file name “POINTPOS.TXT” is assumed. 
8 Press the soft key [EXEC]. 
This starts reading the decimal point position data of customize data, and “INPUT” blinks in the 
lower right part of the screen. When the read operation ends, the “INPUT” indication disappears. 
To cancel the input of the decimal point position data of customize data, press the soft key [CAN].


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Inputting decimal point position data of customize data (for 15/19-inch display unit) 
Procedure 
1 Make sure the input device is ready for reading. 
2 Press the function key . 
3 Press the vertical soft key [NEXT PAGE] until vertical soft key [TOOL MANAGER] appears. 
Press the vertical soft key [TOOL MANAGER]. 
4 Press the vertical soft key [MAGAZINE], [EACH TOOL], or [TOOL]. 
5 Press the EDIT switch on the machine operator’s panel. 
6 Press the horizontal soft key [F INPUT].


key: chroma:document
string_value:
7 Press the horizontal soft key [CSTM-DPOINT]. 
8 Type the name of the file that you want to input. 
If the input file name is omitted, default input file name “POINTPOS.TXT” is assumed. 
9 Press the horizontal soft key [EXEC]. 
This starts reading the decimal point position data of customize data, and “INPUT” blinks in the 
lower right part of the screen. When the read operation ends, the “INPUT” indication disappears.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
To cancel the input of the decimal point position data of customize data, press the horizontal soft key 
[CAN]. 
8.2.8.14 Outputting decimal point position data of customize data 
Decimal point position data of customize data is output from the memory of the CNC to an external 
device in the output format. 
Outputting decimal point position data of customize data (for 10.4-inch display unit) 
Procedure 
1 Make sure the output device is ready for output.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
2 Press the function key to display the tool management screen, magazine screen, or each tool 
data screen. 
3 Press the EDIT switch on the machine operator’s panel. 
4 Press the soft key [(OPRT)]. 
5 Press the soft key [F OUTPUT]. 
6 Press the soft key [CSTM-DPOINT].


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64694EN/01 OPERATION 8. DATA INPUT/OUTPUT
- 959 - 
7 Type the file name that you want to output. 
If the file name is omitted, default file name “POINTPOS.TXT” is assumed. 
8 Press the soft key [EXEC]. 
This starts outputting the decimal point position data of customize data, and “OUTPUT” blinks in 
the lower right part of the screen. When the write operation ends, the “OUTPUT” indication 
disappears. 
To cancel the output, press the soft key [CAN].


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Outputting decimal point position data of customize data (for 15/19-inch display 
unit) 
Procedure 
1 Make sure the output device is ready for output. 
2 Press the function key . 
3 Press the vertical soft key [NEXT PAGE] until vertical soft key [TOOL MANAGER] appears. 
Press the vertical soft key [TOOL MANAGER]. 
4 Press the vertical soft key [MAGAZINE], [EACH TOOL], or [TOOL]. 
5 Press the EDIT switch on the machine operator’s panel. 
6 Press the horizontal soft key [F OUTPUT].


key: chroma:document
string_value:
7 Press the horizontal soft key [CSTM-DPOINT]. 
8 Type the file name that you want to output. 
If the file name is omitted, default file name “POINTPOS.TXT” is assumed. 
9 Press the horizontal soft key [EXEC]. 
This starts outputting the decimal point position data of customize data, and “OUTPUT” blinks in 
the lower right part of the screen. When the write operation ends, the “OUTPUT” indication 
disappears. 
To cancel the output, press the horizontal soft key [CAN].


key: chroma:document
string_value:
8.2.8.15 Inputting tool geometry data 
Tool geometry data is loaded into the memory of the CNC from an external device. The input format is 
the same as the output format. When tool geometry data with a data number corresponding to existing 
tool geometry data registered in the memory is loaded, the loaded tool geometry data replaces the existing 
data. 
Inputting tool geometry data (for 10.4-inch display unit) 
Procedure 
1 Make sure the input device is ready for reading.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
2 Press the function key to display the tool management screen, magazine screen, each tool 
data screen, or tool geometry data screen. 
3 Press the EDIT switch on the machine operator’s panel. 
4 Press the soft key [(OPRT)]. 
5 Press the soft key [F INPUT]. 
6 Press the soft key [TOOL- GEOM]. 
7 Type the name of the file that you want to input. 
If the input file name is omitted, default input file name “TOOLGEOM.TXT” is assumed. 
8 Press the soft key [EXEC].


key: chroma:document
string_value:
8 Press the soft key [EXEC]. 
This starts reading the tool geometry data, and “INPUT” blinks in the lower right part of the screen. 
When the read operation ends, the “INPUT” indication disappears. 
To cancel the input of the tool geometry data, press the soft key [CAN].


key: chroma:document
string_value:
8. DATA INPUT/OUTPUT OPERATION B-64694EN/01
- 960 - 
NOTE 
1 If the tool with a number of tool geometry data to be changed is registered to the 
magazine when an attempt is made to change the tool geometry data, an alarm 
PS5360, ”TOOL INTERFERENCE CHECK ERROR” is issued. (The data is not 
input.) 
2 After data related to the tool management functions in the NC has all been 
cleared, restore backup data in the following order: Tool geometry data, tool


key: chroma:document
string_value:
management data, and magazine management table. 
Inputting tool geometry data (for 15/19-inch display unit) 
Procedure 
1 Make sure the input device is ready for reading. 
2 Press the function key . 
3 Press the vertical soft key [NEXT PAGE] until vertical soft key [TOOL MANAGER] appears. 
Press the vertical soft key [TOOL MANAGER]. 
4 Press the vertical soft key [MAGAZINE], [EACH TOOL], [TOOL], or [TOOL- GEOM]. 
5 Press the EDIT switch on the machine operator’s panel.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
6 Press the horizontal soft key [F INPUT]. 
7 Press the horizontal soft key [TOOL- GEOM]. 
8 Type the name of the file that you want to input. 
If the input file name is omitted, default input file name “TOOLGEOM.TXT” is assumed. 
9 Press the horizontal soft key [EXEC]. 
This starts reading the tool geometry data, and “INPUT” blinks in the lower right part of the screen. 
When the read operation ends, the “INPUT” indication disappears.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
To cancel the input of the tool geometry data, press the horizontal soft key [CAN]. 
NOTE 
1 If the tool with a number of tool geometry data to be changed is registered to the 
magazine when an attempt is made to change the tool geometry data, an alarm 
PS5360, ”TOOL INTERFERENCE CHECK ERROR” is issued. (The data is not 
input.) 
2 After data related to the tool management functions in the NC has all been 
cleared, restore backup data in the following order: Tool geometry data, tool


key: chroma:document
string_value:
management data, and magazine management table. 
8.2.8.16 Outputting tool geometry data 
Tool geometry data is output from the memory of the CNC to an external device in the output format. 
Outputting tool geometry data (for 10.4-inch display unit) 
Procedure 
1 Make sure the output device is ready for output. 
2 Press the function key to display the tool management screen, magazine screen, each tool 
data screen, or tool geometry data screen.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
3 Press the EDIT switch on the machine operator’s panel. 
4 Press the soft key [(OPRT)]. 
5 Press the soft key [F OUTPUT]. 
6 Press the soft key [TOOL- GEOM].


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64694EN/01 OPERATION 8. DATA INPUT/OUTPUT
- 961 - 
7 Type the file name that you want to output. 
If the output file name is omitted, default output file name “TOOLGEOM.TXT” is assumed. 
8 Press the soft key [EXEC]. 
This starts outputting the tool geometry data, and “OUTPUT” blinks in the lower right part of the 
screen. When the write operation ends, the “OUTPUT” indication disappears. 
To cancel the output, press the soft key [CAN]. 
Outputting tool geometry data (for 15/19-inch display unit)


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Procedure 
1 Make sure the output device is ready for output. 
2 Press the function key . 
3 Press the vertical soft key [NEXT PAGE] until vertical soft key [TOOL MANAGER] appears. 
Press the vertical soft key [TOOL MANAGER]. 
4 Press the vertical soft key [MAGAZINE], [EACH TOOL], [TOOL], or [TOOL- GEOM]. 
5 Press the EDIT switch on the machine operator’s panel. 
6 Press the horizontal soft key [F OUTPUT]. 
7 Press the horizontal soft key [TOOL- GEOM].


key: chroma:document
string_value:
8 Type the file name that you want to output. 
If the output file name is omitted, default output file name “TOOLGEOM.TXT” is assumed. 
9 Press the horizontal soft key [EXEC]. 
This starts outputting the tool geometry data, and “OUTPUT” blinks in the lower right part of the 
screen. When the write operation ends, the “OUTPUT” indication disappears. 
To cancel the output, press the horizontal soft key [CAN]. 
8.2.9 Inputting and Outputting Tool Life Management Data


key: chroma:document
string_value:
8.2.9.1 Inputting tool life management data 
Tool life management data is loaded into the memory of the CNC from an external device such as a 
memory card. 
Inputting tool life management data (for 10.4-inch display unit) 
Procedure 
1 Make sure the input device is ready for reading. 
2 Press the EDIT switch on the machine operator’s panel. 
3 Press the function key . 
4 Press the continuous menu key and chapter selection soft key [TOOL LIFE]. 
5 Press the soft key [(OPRT)].


key: chroma:document
string_value:
When the tool life management (group editing) screen is displayed, press soft key [END] to display 
the tool life management (list) screen. 
6 Press the soft key [F INPUT]. 
7 Type the name of the file that you want to input. 
If the input file name is omitted, default input file name “TOOLLIFE.TXT” is assumed. 
8 Press the soft key [EXEC]. 
This starts reading the tool life management data, and “INPUT” blinks in the lower right part of the


key: chroma:document
string_value:
screen. When the read operation ends, the “INPUT” indication disappears. 
To cancel the input of the program, press the soft key [CAN].


key: chroma:document
string_value:
8. DATA INPUT/OUTPUT OPERATION B-64694EN/01
- 962 - 
NOTE 
 Before tool life management data is input, all tool life management data is 
erased. 
Inputting tool life management data (for 15/19-inch display unit) 
Procedure 
1 Make sure the input device is ready for reading. 
2 Press the EDIT switch on the machine operator’s panel. 
3 Press the function key . 
4 Press the vertical soft key [NEXT PAGE] until vertical soft key [TOOL LIFE] appears. 
5 Press the vertical soft key [TOOL LIFE].


key: chroma:document
string_value:
When the tool life management (group editing) screen is displayed, press soft key [END] to display 
the tool life management (list) screen. 
6 Press the horizontal soft key [F INPUT]. 
7 Type the name of the file that you want to input. 
If the input file name is omitted, default input file name “TOOLLIFE.TXT” is assumed. 
8 Press the horizontal soft key [EXEC]. 
This starts reading the tool life management data, and “INPUT” blinks in the lower right part of the


key: chroma:document
string_value:
screen. When the read operation ends, the “INPUT” indication disappears. 
To cancel the input of the program, press the horizontal soft key [CAN]. 
8.2.9.2 Outputting tool life management data 
Tool life management data stored in the memory of the CNC is output to an external device such as a 
memory card. 
Outputting tool life management data (for 10.4-inch display unit) 
Procedure 
1 Make sure the output device is ready for output. 
2 Press the EDIT switch on the machine operator’s panel.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
3 Press the function key . 
4 Press the continuous menu key and chapter selection soft key [TOOL LIFE]. 
5 Press the soft key [(OPRT)]. 
When the tool life management (group editing) screen is displayed, press soft key [END] to display 
the tool life management (list) screen. 
6 Press the soft key [F OUTPUT]. 
7 Type the file name that you want to output. 
If the output file name is omitted, default output file name “TOOLLIFE.TXT” is assumed. 
8 Press the soft key [EXEC].


key: chroma:document
string_value:
8 Press the soft key [EXEC]. 
This starts outputting the tool life management data, and “OUTPUT” blinks in the lower right part of 
the screen. When the write operation ends, the “OUTPUT” indication disappears. 
To cancel the output, press the soft key [CAN]. 
Outputting tool life management data (for 15/19-inch display unit) 
Procedure 
1 Make sure the output device is ready for output. 
2 Press the EDIT switch on the machine operator’s panel. 
3 Press the function key .


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64694EN/01 OPERATION 8. DATA INPUT/OUTPUT
- 963 - 
4 Press the vertical soft key [NEXT PAGE] until vertical soft key [TOOL LIFE] appears. 
5 Press the vertical soft key [TOOL LIFE]. 
When the tool life management (group editing) screen is displayed, press soft key [END] to display 
the tool life management (list) screen. 
6 Press the horizontal soft key [F OUTPUT]. 
7 Type the file name that you want to output.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
If the output file name is omitted, default output file name “TOOLLIFE.TXT” is assumed. 
8 Press the horizontal soft key [EXEC]. 
This starts outputting the tool life management data, and “OUTPUT” blinks in the lower right part of 
the screen. When the write operation ends, the “OUTPUT” indication disappears. 
To cancel the output, press the horizontal soft key [CAN]. 
8.3 INPUT/OUTPUT ON THE ALL IO SCREEN


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Just by using the ALL IO screen, you can input and output programs, parameters, offset data, pitch error 
compensation data, macro variables, workpiece coordinate system data, operation history data, and tool 
management data to an external I/O device. 
 CAUTION 
 While an external I/O device is being accessed, do not turn the power to the 
CNC off or remove the device, or the device may be damaged. 
NOTE 
 The ALL IO screen can be operated only if a memory card or USB memory is


key: chroma:document
string_value:
selected as an external I/O device. Use NC parameter No.20 to select an external 
I/O device. 
The following explains how to display the ALL IO screen: 
Displaying the ALL IO screen (for 8.4/10.4-inch display unit) 
Procedure 
1 Press the function key . 
2 Press the continuous menu key several times. 
3 Press the soft key [ALL IO] to display the ALL IO screen. 
The subsequent steps to select data from the ALL IO screen will be explained for each type of data.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Displaying the ALL IO screen (for 15/19-inch display unit) 
Procedure 
1 Press the function key . 
2 Press the vertical soft key [NEXT PAGE] until vertical soft key [ALL I/O] appears. 
3 Press the vertical soft key [ALL I/O] to display the ALL IO screen. 
The subsequent steps to select data from the ALL IO screen will be explained for each type of data.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
8. DATA INPUT/OUTPUT OPERATION B-64694EN/01
- 964 - 
Procedure for changing the target folder for inputting and outputting data (for 
8.4/10.4-inch display unit) 
The last folder displayed on the USB MEMORY FILE LIST screen is treated as the default target folder 
for inputting and outputting data in a USB memory. If you want to input data from or output it to another 
folder, perform the following operation. 
1 Display the ALL IO screen.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
1 Display the ALL IO screen. 
2 Press the soft key [CHANGE FOLDER]. The USB MEMORY FILE LIST screen appears. 
3 Display a folder you want to use for inputting and outputting data. 
4 Press the soft key [RETURN ALL I/O]. The ALL IO screen appears again. The folder displayed on 
the list screen is used as the target folder for inputting and outputting data.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64694EN/01 OPERATION 8. DATA INPUT/OUTPUT
- 965 - 
Procedure for changing the target folder for inputting and outputting data (for 
15/19-inch display unit) 
The last folder displayed on the USB MEMORY FILE LIST screen is treated as the default target folder 
for inputting and outputting data in a USB memory. If you want to input data from or output it to another 
folder, perform the following operation. 
1 Press the soft key [(OPRT)] on the ALL IO screen.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
2 Press the horizontal soft key [CHANGE FOLDER]. The USB MEMORY FILE LIST screen 
appears. 
3 Display a folder you want to use for inputting and outputting data. 
4 Press the soft key [RETURN ALL I/O]. The ALL IO screen appears again. The folder displayed on 
the list screen is used as the target folder for inputting and outputting data.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
8. DATA INPUT/OUTPUT OPERATION B-64694EN/01
- 966 - 
8.3.1 Inputting/Outputting a Program 
A program can be input and output using the ALL IO screen. 
Inputting a program (for 8.4/10.4-inch display unit) 
Procedure 
1 Press the soft key [PROGRAM] on the ALL IO screen. 
2 Press the EDIT switch on the machine operator’s panel. 
3 Press the soft key [(OPRT)]. 
4 Press the soft key [N INPUT]. 
5 Set the name of the file that you want to input. 
Type a file name, and press the soft key [F NAME].


key: chroma:document
string_value:
If the input file name is omitted, default input file name “ALL-PROG.TXT” is assumed. 
See the Table 8.3.1 (a) for details. 
6 Set the program number to be used after the input. 
Type a program number, and press the soft key [P SET]. 
If no program number is specified here, the program number in the file is adopted as is. 
7 Press the soft key [EXEC]. 
This starts reading the program, and “INPUT” blinks in the lower right part of the screen. When the


key: chroma:document
string_value:
read operation ends, the “INPUT” indication disappears. 
To cancel the input of the program, press the soft key [CAN]. 
Table 8.3.1 (a) 
[F SET] [P SET] Input file name Input program Input program name 
BLANK BLANK ALL-PROG.TXT All programs in ALL-PROG.TXT File name at the time the file is saved 
BLANK INPUT ALL-PROG.TXT First program in ALL-PROG.TXT Program name set with [P SET] 
INPUT BLANK File name set 
with [F NAME] 
All programs in the file specified


key: chroma:document
string_value:
with [F NAME] File name at the time the file is saved 
INPUT INPUT File name set 
with [F NAME] 
First program in the file specified 
with [F NAME] Program name set with [P SET] 
Inputting a program (for 15/19-inch display unit) 
Procedure 
1 On the ALL IO screen, press the vertical soft key [NEXT PAGE] until vertical soft key 
[PROGRAM] appears. 
Press the vertical soft key [PROGRAM]. 
2 Press the EDIT switch on the machine operator’s panel. 
3 Press the horizontal soft key [N INPUT].


key: chroma:document
string_value:
4 Set the name of the file that you want to input. 
Type a file name, and press the horizontal soft key [F NAME]. 
If the input file name is omitted, default input file name “ALL-PROG.TXT” is assumed. 
See the Table 8.3.1 (b) for details. 
5 Set the program number to be used after the input. 
Type a program number, and press the horizontal soft key [P SET]. 
If no program number is specified here, the program number in the file is adopted as is. 
6 Press the horizontal soft key [EXEC].


key: chroma:document
string_value:
This starts reading the program, and “INPUT” blinks in the lower right part of the screen. When the 
read operation ends, the “INPUT” indication disappears. 
To cancel the input of the program, press the horizontal soft key [CAN].


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64694EN/01 OPERATION 8. DATA INPUT/OUTPUT
- 967 - 
Table 8.3.1 (b) 
[F SET] [P SET] Input file name Input program Input program name 
BLANK BLANK ALL-PROG.TXT All programs in ALL-PROG.TXT File name at the time the file is saved 
BLANK INPUT ALL-PROG.TXT First program in ALL-PROG.TXT Program name set with [P SET] 
INPUT BLANK File name set 
with [F NAME] 
All programs in the file specified 
with [F NAME] File name at the time the file is saved 
INPUT INPUT File name set 
with [F NAME]


key: chroma:document
string_value:
with [F NAME] 
First program in the file specified 
with [F NAME] Program name set with [P SET] 
Outputting a program (for 8.4/10.4-inch display unit) 
Procedure 
1 Press the soft key [PROGRAM] on the ALL IO screen. 
2 Press the EDIT switch on the machine operator’s panel. 
3 Press the soft key [(OPRT)]. 
4 Press the soft key [F OUTPUT]. 
5 Set the program that you want to output. 
Type a program number, and press the soft key [P SET].


key: chroma:document
string_value:
If O-9999 is typed, all programs in the memory are output. 
 If the start program number and the end program number separated by comma (,) is typed, multiple 
programs in specified range are output at one time. 
6 Set the file name to be output. 
Type a file name, and press the soft key [F NAME]. 
When no file name is set, the output file name is assumed to be “O-number” if a single program 
number is specified; if O-9999 is specified, the output file name is assumed to be 
“ALL-PROG.TXT”.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
“ALL-PROG.TXT”. 
See the Table 8.3.1 (c) for details. 
(For an explanation of foreground folders, see Section, “Default Folders”, and for how to change 
foreground folders, see Section, “SELECTING A DEFAULT FOLDER”) 
7 Press the soft key [EXEC]. 
This starts outputting the program, and “OUTPUT” blinks in the lower right part of the screen. 
When the read operation ends, the “OUTPUT” indication disappears. 
To cancel the output, press the soft key [CAN]. 
Table 8.3.1 (c)


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Table 8.3.1 (c) 
[F SET] [P SET] Output file name Output program 
BLANK BLANK or (O-9999) ALL-PROG.TXT All programs in the foreground folders 
displayed in the program folder 
BLANK INPUT Program name set with [P SET] Program in the NC that is set with [P SET] 
BLANK Oxxxx,Oyyyy ALL-PROG.TXT Programs No.xxxx to No.yyyy that is set 
with [P SET] 
INPUT BLANK or (O-9999) File name set with [F NAME] All programs in the foreground folders 
displayed in the program folder


key: chroma:document
string_value:
INPUT INPUT File name set with [F NAME] Program in the NC that is set with [P SET] 
INPUT Oxxxx,Oyyyy File name set with [F SET] Programs No.xxxx to No.yyyy that is set 
with [P SET] 
Outputting a program (for 15/19-inch display unit) 
Procedure 
1 On the ALL IO screen, press the vertical soft key [NEXT PAGE] until vertical soft key 
[PROGRAM] appears. 
Press the vertical soft key [PROGRAM]. 
2 Press the EDIT switch on the machine operator’s panel 
3 Press the horizontal soft key [F OUTPUT].


key: chroma:document
string_value:
8. DATA INPUT/OUTPUT OPERATION B-64694EN/01
- 968 - 
4 Set the program that you want to output. 
Type a program number, and press the horizontal soft key [P SET]. 
If O-9999 is typed, all programs in the memory are output. 
 If the start program number and the end program number separated by comma (,) is typed, multiple 
programs in specified range are output at one time. 
5 Set the file name to be output. 
Type a file name, and press the horizontal soft key [F NAME].


key: chroma:document
string_value:
When no file name is set, the output file name is assumed to be “O-number” if a single program 
number is specified; if O-9999 is specified, the output file name is assumed to be 
“ALL-PROG.TXT”. 
See the Table 8.3.1 (d) for details. 
(For an explanation of foreground folders, see Section, “Default Folders”, and for how to change 
foreground folders, see Section, “SELECTING A DEFAULT FOLDER”) 
6 Press the horizontal soft key [EXEC].


key: chroma:document
string_value:
This starts outputting the program, and “OUTPUT” blinks in the lower right part of the screen. 
When the read operation ends, the “OUTPUT” indication disappears. 
To cancel the output, press the horizontal soft key [CAN]. 
Table 8.3.1 (d) 
[F SET] [P SET] Output file name Output program 
BLANK BLANK or (O-9999) ALL-PROG.TXT All programs in the foreground folders 
displayed in the program folder 
BLANK INPUT Program name set with [P SET] Program in the NC that is set with [P SET]


key: chroma:document
string_value:
BLANK Oxxxx,Oyyyy ALL-PROG.TXT Programs No.xxxx to No.yyyy that is set 
with [P SET] 
INPUT BLANK or (O-9999) File name set with [F NAME] All programs in the foreground folders 
displayed in the program folder 
INPUT INPUT File name set with [F NAME] Program in the NC that is set with [P SET] 
INPUT Oxxxx,Oyyyy File name set with [F SET] Programs No.xxxx to No.yyyy that is set 
with [P SET] 
8.3.2 Inputting/Outputting all Programs and Folders


key: chroma:document
string_value:
All programs and folders can be input and output using the ALL IO screen. 
Inputting all programs and folders (for 8.4/10.4-inch display unit) 
Procedure 
1 Press the soft key [PROGRAM] on the ALL IO screen. 
2 Press the EDIT switch on the machine operator’s panel. 
Select EDIT mode for all paths. 
3 Press the soft key [(OPRT)]. 
4 Press the soft key [ALL INPUT]. 
5 Set the name of the file that you want to input. 
Type a file name, and press the soft key [F NAME].


key: chroma:document
string_value:
If the input file name is omitted, default input file name “ALL-FLDR.TXT” is assumed. 
6 Press the soft key [EXEC]. 
This starts reading the program, and “INPUT” blinks in the lower right part of the screen. When the 
read operation ends, the “INPUT” indication disappears. 
To cancel the input of the program, press the soft key [CAN].


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64694EN/01 OPERATION 8. DATA INPUT/OUTPUT
- 969 - 
Inputting all programs and folders (for 15/19-inch display unit) 
Procedure 
1 On the ALL IO screen, press the vertical soft key [NEXT PAGE] until vertical soft key 
[PROGRAM] appears. 
Press the vertical soft key [PROGRAM]. 
2 Press the EDIT switch on the machine operator’s panel. 
 Select EDIT mode for all paths. 
3 Press the horizontal soft key [ALL INPUT]. 
4 Set the name of the file that you want to input.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Type a file name, and press the horizontal soft key [F NAME]. 
If the input file name is omitted, default input file name “ALL-FLDR.TXT” is assumed. 
5 Press the horizontal soft key [EXEC]. 
This starts reading the program, and “INPUT” blinks in the lower right part of the screen. When the 
read operation ends, the “INPUT” indication disappears. 
To cancel the input of the program, press the horizontal soft key [CAN]. 
Outputting all programs and folders (for 8.4/10.4-inch display unit) 
Procedure


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Procedure 
1 Press the soft key [PROGRAM] on the ALL IO screen. 
2 Press the EDIT switch on the machine operator’s panel. 
3 Press the soft key [(OPRT)]. 
4 Press the soft key [ALL OUTPUT]. 
5 Set the file name to be output. 
Type a file name, and press the soft key [F NAME]. 
If the input file name is omitted, default input file name “ALL-FLDR.TXT” is assumed. 
6 Press the soft key [EXEC]. 
This starts outputting the program, and “OUTPUT” blinks in the lower right part of the screen.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
When the read operation ends, the “OUTPUT” indication disappears. 
To cancel the output, press the soft key [CAN]. 
Outputting all programs and folders (for 15/19-inch display unit) 
Procedure 
1 On the ALL IO screen, press the vertical soft key [NEXT PAGE] until vertical soft key 
[PROGRAM] appears. 
Press the vertical soft key [PROGRAM]. 
2 Press the EDIT switch on the machine operator’s panel. 
3 Press the horizontal soft key [ALL OUTPUT]. 
4 Set the file name to be output.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Type a file name, and press the horizontal soft key [F NAME]. 
If the input file name is omitted, default input file name “ALL-FLDR.TXT” is assumed. 
5 Press the horizontal soft key [EXEC]. 
This starts outputting the program, and “OUTPUT” blinks in the lower right part of the screen. When 
the read operation ends, the “OUTPUT” indication disappears. 
To cancel the output, press the horizontal soft key [CAN].


key: chroma:document
string_value:
8. DATA INPUT/OUTPUT OPERATION B-64694EN/01
- 970 - 
8.3.3 Inputting and Outputting Parameters 
Parameters can be input and output using the ALL IO screen. 
Inputting parameters (for 8.4/10.4-inch display unit) 
Procedure 
1 Press the function key . 
2 Press the continuous menu key until soft key [SETTING] appears. 
Press the soft key [SETTING]. 
3 Press the MDI switch on the machine operator’s panel or enter state emergency stop.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
4 Enter 1 in response to the prompt for “PARAMETER WRITE” in setting data. Alarm SW0100, 
“PARAMETER ENABLE SWITCH ON” appears. 
5 Press the soft key [PARAMETER] on the ALL IO screen. 
6 Press the EDIT switch on the machine operator’s panel or enter state emergency stop. 
7 Press the soft key [(OPRT)]. 
8 Press the soft key [N INPUT]. 
9 Set the name of the file that you want to input. 
Type a file name, and press the soft key [F NAME].


key: chroma:document
string_value:
If the input file name is omitted, default input file name “CNC-PARA.TXT” is assumed. 
10 Press the soft key [EXEC]. 
This starts reading the parameter, and “INPUT” blinks in the lower right part of the screen. When 
the read operation ends, the “INPUT” indication disappears. 
To cancel the input of the program, press the soft key [CAN]. 
11 Press the function key . 
12 Press the soft key [SETTING]. 
13 Press the MDI switch on the machine operator’s panel or enter state emergency stop.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
14 Enter 0 in response to the prompt for “PARAMETER WRITE” in setting data. 
15 Turn the power of the CNC on again. 
Inputting parameters (for 15/19-inch display unit) 
Procedure 
1 Press the function key . 
2 Press the vertical soft key [NEXT PAGE] until vertical soft key [SETTING] appears. 
Press the vertical soft key [SETTING]. 
3 Press the MDI switch on the machine operator’s panel or enter state emergency stop.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
4 Enter 1 in response to the prompt for “PARAMETER WRITE” in setting data. Alarm SW0100, 
“PARAMETER ENABLE SWITCH ON” appears. 
5 On the ALL IO screen, press the vertical soft key [NEXT PAGE] until vertical soft key 
[PARAMETER] appears. 
Press the vertical soft key [PARAMETER]. 
6 Press the EDIT switch on the machine operator’s panel or enter state emergency stop. 
7 Press the horizontal soft key [N INPUT]. 
8 Set the name of the file that you want to input.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Type a file name, and press the horizontal soft key [F NAME]. 
If the input file name is omitted, default input file name “CNC-PARA.TXT” is assumed. 
9 Press the horizontal soft key [EXEC]. 
This starts reading the parameter, and “INPUT” blinks in the lower right part of the screen. When 
the read operation ends, the “INPUT” indication disappears. 
To cancel the input of the program, press the horizontal soft key [CAN].


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64694EN/01 OPERATION 8. DATA INPUT/OUTPUT
- 971 - 
10 Press the function key . 
11 Press the vertical soft key [SETTING]. 
12 Press the MDI switch on the machine operator’s panel or enter state emergency stop. 
13 Enter 0 in response to the prompt for “PARAMETER WRITE” in setting data. 
14 Turn the power of the CNC on again. 
Outputting parameters (for 8.4/10.4-inch display unit) 
Procedure 
1 Press the soft key [PARAMETER] on the ALL IO screen.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
2 Press the EDIT switch on the machine operator’s panel or enter state emergency stop. 
3 Press the soft key [(OPRT)]. 
4 Press the soft key [F OUTPUT].
5 Set the file name to be output. 
Type a file name, and press the soft key [F NAME]. 
If the file name is omitted, default file name “CNC-PARA.TXT” is assumed. 
6 Press the soft key [EXEC]. 
This starts outputting the parameter, and “OUTPUT” blinks in the lower right part of the screen.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
When the read operation ends, the “OUTPUT” indication disappears. 
To cancel the output, press the soft key [CAN]. 
Outputting parameters (for 15/19-inch display unit) 
Procedure 
1 On the ALL IO screen, press the vertical soft key [NEXT PAGE] until vertical soft key 
[PARAMETER] appears. 
Press the vertical soft key [PARAMETER]. 
2 Press the EDIT switch on the machine operator’s panel or enter state emergency stop. 
3 Press the horizontal soft key [F OUTPUT]. 
4 Set the file name to be output.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Type a file name, and press the horizontal soft key [F NAME]. 
If the file name is omitted, default file name “CNC-PARA.TXT” is assumed. 
5 Press the horizontal soft key [EXEC]. 
This starts outputting the parameter, and “OUTPUT” blinks in the lower right part of the screen. 
When the read operation ends, the “OUTPUT” indication disappears. 
To cancel the output, press the horizontal soft key [CAN]. 
8.3.4 Inputting and Outputting Offset Data


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Offset data can be input and output using the ALL IO screen. 
Inputting offset data (for 8.4/10.4-inch display unit) 
Procedure 
1 Press the soft key [OFFSET] on the ALL IO screen. 
2 Press the EDIT switch on the machine operator’s panel or enter state emergency stop. 
3 Press the soft key [(OPRT)]. 
4 Press the soft key [N INPUT]. 
5 Set the name of the file that you want to input. 
Type a file name, and press the soft key [F NAME].


key: chroma:document
string_value:
8. DATA INPUT/OUTPUT OPERATION B-64694EN/01
- 972 - 
6 Press the soft key [EXEC]. 
This starts reading the offset data, and “INPUT” blinks in the lower right part of the screen. When 
the read operation ends, the “INPUT” indication disappears. 
To cancel the input of the program, press the soft key [CAN]. 
Inputting offset data (for 15/19-inch display unit) 
Procedure 
1 On the ALL IO screen, press the vertical soft key [NEXT PAGE] until vertical soft key [OFFSET] 
appears.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
appears. 
Press the vertical soft key [OFFSET]. 
2 Press the EDIT switch on the machine operator’s panel or enter state emergency stop. 
3 Press the horizontal soft key [N INPUT]. 
4 Set the name of the file that you want to input. 
Type a file name, and press the horizontal soft key [F NAME]. 
If the input file name is omitted, default input file name “TOOLOFST.TXT” is assumed. 
5 Press the horizontal soft key [EXEC].


key: chroma:document
string_value:
This starts reading the offset data, and “INPUT” blinks in the lower right part of the screen. When 
the read operation ends, the “INPUT” indication disappears. 
To cancel the input of the program, press the horizontal soft key [CAN]. 
Outputting offset data (for 8.4/10.4-inch display unit) 
Procedure 
1 Press the soft key [OFFSET] on the ALL IO screen. 
2 Press the EDIT switch on the machine operator’s panel or enter state emergency stop. 
3 Press the soft key [(OPRT)].


key: chroma:document
string_value:
4 Press the soft key [F OUTPUT]. 
5 Set the file name to be output. 
Type a file name, and press the soft key [F NAME]. 
If the file name is omitted, default file name “TOOLOFST.TXT” is assumed. 
6 Press the soft key [EXEC]. 
This starts outputting the offset data, and “OUTPUT” blinks in the lower right part of the screen. 
When the read operation ends, the “OUTPUT” indication disappears. 
To cancel the output, press the soft key [CAN]. 
Outputting offset data (for 15/19-inch display unit)


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Procedure 
1 On the ALL IO screen, press the vertical soft key [NEXT PAGE] until vertical soft key [OFFSET] 
appears. 
Press the vertical soft key [OFFSET]. 
2 Press the EDIT switch on the machine operator’s panel or enter state emergency stop. 
3 Press the horizontal soft key [F OUTPUT]. 
4 Set the file name to be output. 
Type a file name, and press the horizontal soft key [F NAME]. 
If the file name is omitted, default file name “TOOLOFST.TXT” is assumed.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
5 Press the horizontal soft key [EXEC]. 
This starts outputting the offset data, and “OUTPUT” blinks in the lower right part of the screen. 
When the read operation ends, the “OUTPUT” indication disappears. 
To cancel the output, press the horizontal soft key [CAN].


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64694EN/01 OPERATION 8. DATA INPUT/OUTPUT
- 973 - 
8.3.5 Inputting/Outputting Pitch Error Compensation Data 
Pitch error compensation data can be input and output using the ALL IO screen. 
Inputting pitch error compensation data (for 8.4/10.4-inch display unit) 
Procedure 
1 Press the function key . 
2 Press the continuous menu key until soft key [SETTING] appears. 
Press the soft key [SETTING]. 
3 Press the MDI switch on the machine operator’s panel or enter state emergency stop.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
4 Enter 1 in response to the prompt for “PARAMETER WRITE” in setting data. Alarm SW0100, 
“PARAMETER ENABLE SWITCH ON” appears. 
5 Press the soft key [PITCH] on the ALL IO screen. 
6 Press the EDIT switch on the machine operator’s panel or enter state emergency stop. 
7 Press the soft key [(OPRT)]. 
8 Press the soft key [N INPUT]. 
9 Set the name of the file that you want to input. 
Type a file name, and press the soft key [F NAME].


key: chroma:document
string_value:
If the input file name is omitted, default input file name “PITCH.TXT” is assumed. 
10 Press the soft key [EXEC]. 
This starts reading the pitch error compensation data, and “INPUT” blinks in the lower right part of 
the screen. When the read operation ends, the “INPUT” indication disappears. 
To cancel the input of the program, press the soft key [CAN]. 
11 Press the function key . 
12 Press the soft key [SETTING].


key: chroma:document
string_value:
13 Press the MDI switch on the machine operator’s panel or enter state emergency stop. 
14 Enter 0 in response to the prompt for “PARAMETER WRITE” in setting data. 
15 Turn the power of the CNC on again. 
Inputting pitch error compensation data (for 15/19-inch display unit) 
Procedure 
1 Press the function key . 
2 Press the vertical soft key [NEXT PAGE] until vertical soft key [SETTING] appears. 
Press the vertical soft key [SETTING].


key: chroma:document
string_value:
3 Press the MDI switch on the machine operator’s panel or enter state emergency stop. 
4 Enter 1 in response to the prompt for “PARAMETER WRITE” in setting data. Alarm SW0100, 
“PARAMETER ENABLE SWITCH ON” appears. 
5 On the ALL IO screen, press the vertical soft key [NEXT PAGE] until vertical soft key [PITCH 
ERROR] appears. 
Press the vertical soft key [PITCH ERROR]. 
6 Press the EDIT switch on the machine operator’s panel or enter state emergency stop.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
7 Press the horizontal soft key [N INPUT]. 
8 Set the name of the file that you want to input. 
Type a file name, and press the horizontal soft key [F NAME]. 
If the input file name is omitted, default input file name “PITCH.TXT” is assumed. 
9 Press the horizontal soft key [EXEC]. 
This starts reading the pitch error compensation data, and “INPUT” blinks in the lower right part of 
the screen. When the read operation ends, the “INPUT” indication disappears.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
8. DATA INPUT/OUTPUT OPERATION B-64694EN/01
- 974 - 
10 Press the function key . 
11 Press the vertical soft key [SETTING]. 
12 Press the MDI switch on the machine operator’s panel or enter state emergency stop. 
13 Enter 0 in response to the prompt for “PARAMETER WRITE” in setting data. 
14 Turn the power of the CNC on again. 
Outputting pitch error compensation data (for 8.4/10.4-inch display unit) 
Procedure 
1 Press the soft key [PITCH] on the ALL IO screen.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
2 Press the EDIT switch on the machine operator’s panel or enter state emergency stop. 
3 Press the soft key [(OPRT)]. 
4 Press the soft key [F OUTPUT]. 
5 Set the file name to be output. 
Type a file name, and press the soft key [F NAME]. 
If the file name is omitted, default file name “PITCH.TXT” is assumed. 
6 Press the soft key [EXEC]. 
This starts outputting the pitch error compensation data, and “OUTPUT” blinks in the lower right


key: chroma:document
string_value:
part of the screen. When the read operation ends, the “OUTPUT” indication disappears. 
To cancel the output, press the soft key [CAN]. 
Outputting pitch error compensation data (for 15/19-inch display unit) 
Procedure 
1 On the ALL IO screen, press the vertical soft key [NEXT PAGE] until vertical soft key [PITCH 
ERROR] appears. 
Press the vertical soft key [PITCH ERROR]. 
2 Press the EDIT switch on the machine operator’s panel or enter state emergency stop.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
3 Press the horizontal soft key [F OUTPUT]. 
4 Set the file name to be output. 
Type a file name, and press the horizontal soft key [F NAME]. 
If the file name is omitted, default file name “PITCH.TXT” is assumed. 
5 Press the horizontal soft key [EXEC]. 
This starts outputting the pitch error compensation data, and “OUTPUT” blinks in the lower right 
part of the screen. When the read operation ends, the “OUTPUT” indication disappears. 
To cancel the output, press the horizontal soft key [CAN].


key: chroma:document
string_value:
8.3.6 Inputting/Outputting Custom Macro Common Variables 
Custom macro common variables can be input and output using the ALL IO screen. 
Inputting custom macro common variables (for 8.4/10.4-inch display unit) 
Procedure 
1 Press the soft key [MACRO] on the ALL IO screen. 
2 Press the EDIT switch on the machine operator’s panel or enter state emergency stop. 
3 Press the soft key [(OPRT)]. 
4 Press the soft key [N INPUT]. 
5 Set the name of the file that you want to input.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Type a file name, and press the soft key [F NAME]. 
If the input file name is omitted, default input file name “MACRO.TXT” is assumed.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64694EN/01 OPERATION 8. DATA INPUT/OUTPUT
- 975 - 
6 Press the soft key [EXEC]. 
This starts reading the custom macro common variables, and “INPUT” blinks in the lower right part 
of the screen. When the read operation ends, the “INPUT” indication disappears. 
To cancel the input of the program, press the soft key [CAN]. 
Inputting custom macro common variables (for 15/19-inch display unit) 
Procedure


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Procedure 
1 On the ALL IO screen, press the vertical soft key [NEXT PAGE] until vertical soft key [MACRO] 
appears. 
Press the vertical soft key [MACRO]. 
2 Press the EDIT switch on the machine operator’s panel or enter state emergency stop. 
3 Press the horizontal soft key [N INPUT]. 
4 Set the name of the file that you want to input. 
Type a file name, and press the horizontal soft key [F NAME]. 
If the input file name is omitted, default input file name “MACRO.TXT” is assumed.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
5 Press the horizontal soft key [EXEC]. 
This starts reading the custom macro common variables, and “INPUT” blinks in the lower right part 
of the screen. When the read operation ends, the “INPUT” indication disappears. 
To cancel the input of the program, press the horizontal soft key [CAN]. 
Outputting custom macro common variables (for 8.4/10.4-inch display unit) 
Procedure 
1 Press the soft key [MACRO] on the ALL IO screen.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
2 Press the EDIT switch on the machine operator’s panel or enter state emergency stop. 
3 Press the soft key [(OPRT)]. 
4 Press the soft key [F OUTPUT]. 
5 Set the file name to be output. 
Type a file name, and press the soft key [F NAME]. 
If the file name is omitted, default file name “MACRO.TXT” is assumed. 
6 Press the soft key [EXEC]. 
This starts outputting the custom macro common variables, and “OUTPUT” blinks in the lower right


key: chroma:document
string_value:
part of the screen. When the read operation ends, the “OUTPUT” indication disappears. 
To cancel the output, press the soft key [CAN]. 
Outputting custom macro common variables (for 15/19-inch display unit) 
Procedure 
1 On the ALL IO screen, press the vertical soft key [NEXT PAGE] until vertical soft key [MACRO] 
appears. 
Press the vertical soft key [MACRO]. 
2 Press the EDIT switch on the machine operator’s panel or enter state emergency stop. 
3 Press the horizontal soft key [F OUTPUT].


key: chroma:document
string_value:
4 Set the file name to be output. 
Type a file name, and press the horizontal soft key [F NAME]. 
If the file name is omitted, default file name “MACRO.TXT” is assumed. 
5 Press the horizontal soft key [EXEC]. 
This starts outputting the custom macro common variables, and “OUTPUT” blinks in the lower right 
part of the screen. When the read operation ends, the “OUTPUT” indication disappears. 
To cancel the output, press the horizontal soft key [CAN].


key: chroma:document
string_value:
8. DATA INPUT/OUTPUT OPERATION B-64694EN/01
- 976 - 
8.3.7 Inputting and Outputting Workpiece Coordinates System 
Data 
Workpiece coordinates system data can be input and output using the ALL IO screen. 
Inputting workpiece coordinate system data (for 8.4/10.4-inch display unit) 
Procedure 
1 Press the soft key [WORK] on the ALL IO screen. 
2 Press the EDIT switch on the machine operator’s panel or enter state emergency stop. 
3 Press the soft key [(OPRT)]. 
4 Press the soft key [N INPUT].


key: chroma:document
string_value:
5 Set the name of the file that you want to input. 
Type a file name, and press the soft key [F NAME]. 
If the input file name is omitted, default input file name “EXT_WKZ.TXT” is assumed. 
6 Press the soft key [EXEC]. 
This starts reading the workpiece coordinate system data, and “INPUT” blinks in the lower right part 
of the screen. When the read operation ends, the “INPUT” indication disappears. 
To cancel the input of the program, press the soft key [CAN].


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Inputting workpiece coordinate system data (for 15/19-inch display unit) 
Procedure 
1 On the ALL IO screen, press the vertical soft key [NEXT PAGE] until vertical soft key [WORK] 
appears. 
Press vertical soft key [WORK]. 
2 Press the EDIT switch on the machine operator’s panel or enter state emergency stop. 
3 Press the horizontal soft key [N INPUT]. 
4 Set the name of the file that you want to input. 
Type a file name, and press the horizontal soft key [F NAME].


key: chroma:document
string_value:
If the input file name is omitted, default input file name “EXT_WKZ.TXT” is assumed. 
5 Press the horizontal soft key [EXEC]. 
This starts reading the workpiece coordinate system data, and “INPUT” blinks in the lower right part 
of the screen. When the read operation ends, the “INPUT” indication disappears. 
To cancel the input of the program, press the horizontal soft key [CAN]. 
Outputting workpiece coordinate system data (for 8.4/10.4-inch display unit) 
Procedure


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Procedure 
1 Press the soft key [WORK] on the ALL IO screen. 
2 Press the EDIT switch on the machine operator’s panel or enter state emergency stop. 
3 Press the soft key [(OPRT)]. 
4 Press the soft key [F OUTPUT]. 
5 Set the file name to be output. 
Type a file name, and press the soft key [F NAME]. 
If the file name is omitted, default file name “EXT_WKZ.TXT” is assumed. 
6 Press the soft key [EXEC]. 
This starts outputting the workpiece coordinate system data, and “OUTPUT” blinks in the lower


key: chroma:document
string_value:
right part of the screen. When the read operation ends, the “OUTPUT” indication disappears. 
To cancel the output, press the soft key [CAN].


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64694EN/01 OPERATION 8. DATA INPUT/OUTPUT
- 977 - 
Outputting workpiece coordinate system data (for 15/19-inch display unit) 
Procedure 
1 On the ALL IO screen, press the vertical soft key [NEXT PAGE] until vertical soft key [WORK] 
appears. 
Press vertical soft key [WORK]. 
2 Press the EDIT switch on the machine operator’s panel or enter state emergency stop. 
3 Press the horizontal soft key [F OUTPUT]. 
4 Set the file name to be output.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Type a file name, and press the horizontal soft key [F NAME]. 
If the file name is omitted, default file name “EXT_WKZ.TXT” is assumed. 
5 Press the horizontal soft key [EXEC]. 
This starts outputting the workpiece coordinate system data, and “OUTPUT” blinks in the lower 
right part of the screen. When the read operation ends, the “OUTPUT” indication disappears. 
To cancel the output, press the horizontal soft key [CAN]. 
8.3.8 Inputting and Outputting Operation History Data


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Operation history data can be output on the ALL IO screen (with function key for 15/19-inch 
display unit). 
Only output operation is permitted for operation history data. 
The output data is of text format. So, to reference the output data you must use an application that can 
handle text files on the personal computer. 
Outputting operation history data (for 8.4/10.4-inch display unit) 
Procedure 
1 Press the soft key [OPERAT HISTRY] on the ALL IO screen.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
2 Press the EDIT switch on the machine operator’s panel or enter state emergency stop. 
3 Press the soft key [(OPRT)]. 
4 Press the soft key [F OUTPUT]. 
5 Set the file name to be output. 
Type a file name, and press the soft key [F NAME]. 
If the file name is omitted, default file name “OPRT_HIS.TXT” is assumed. 
6 Press the soft key [EXEC]. 
This starts outputting the operation history data, and “OUTPUT” blinks in the lower right part of the


key: chroma:document
string_value:
screen. When the read operation ends, the “OUTPUT” indication disappears. 
To cancel the output, press the soft key [CAN]. 
Outputting operation history data (for 15/19-inch display unit) 
Procedure 
1 Press the function key . 
2 On the ALL IO screen, press the vertical soft key [NEXT PAGE] until vertical soft key [OPERAT 
HISTRY] appears. 
Press the vertical soft key [OPERAT HISTRY]. 
3 Press the EDIT switch on the machine operator’s panel or enter state emergency stop.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
4 Press the horizontal soft key [F OUTPUT]. 
5 Set the file name to be output. 
If the file name is omitted, default file name “OPRT_HIS.TXT” is assumed.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
8. DATA INPUT/OUTPUT OPERATION B-64694EN/01
- 978 - 
6 Press the horizontal soft key [EXEC]. 
This starts outputting the operation history data, and “OUTPUT” blinks in the lower right part of the 
screen. When the read operation ends, the “OUTPUT” indication disappears. To cancel the output, 
press the horizontal soft key [CAN]. 
8.3.9 Inputting and Outputting Tool Management Data 
Tool management data can be input and output using the ALL IO screen. 
NOTE


key: chroma:document
string_value:
NOTE 
1 For multi-path systems, place all paths in the EDIT mode before performing input 
and output operations. 
2 The format used is the same as the registration format of the G10 format. 
Inputting tool management data (for 8.4/10.4-inch display unit) 
Procedure 
1 Press the soft key [TOOL] on the ALL IO screen. 
2 Press the EDIT switch on the machine operator’s panel. 
3 Press the soft key [(OPRT)]. 
4 Press the soft key [N INPUT]. 
5 Set the name of the file that you want to input.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Type a file name, and press the soft key [F NAME]. 
If the input file name is omitted, default input file name “TOOL_MNG.TXT” is assumed. 
6 Press the soft key [EXEC]. 
This starts reading the tool management data, and “INPUT” blinks in the lower right part of the 
screen. When the read operation ends, the “INPUT” indication disappears. 
To cancel the input of the program, press the soft key [CAN]. 
Inputting tool management data (for 15/19-inch display unit) 
Procedure


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Procedure 
1 On the ALL IO screen, press the vertical soft key [NEXT PAGE] until vertical soft key [TOOL] 
appears. 
Press the vertical soft key [TOOL]. 
2 Press the EDIT switch on the machine operator’s panel. 
3 Press the horizontal soft key [N INPUT]. 
4 Set the name of the file that you want to input. 
Type a file name, and press the horizontal soft key [F NAME]. 
If the input file name is omitted, default input file name “TOOL_MNG.TXT” is assumed. 
5 Press the horizontal soft key [EXEC].


key: chroma:document
string_value:
This starts reading the tool management data, and “INPUT” blinks in the lower right part of the 
screen. When the read operation ends, the “INPUT” indication disappears. 
To cancel the input of the program, press the horizontal soft key [CAN]. 
Outputting tool management data (for 8.4/10.4-inch display unit) 
Procedure 
1 Press the soft key [TOOL] on the ALL IO screen. 
2 Press the EDIT switch on the machine operator’s panel. 
3 Press the soft key [(OPRT)]. 
4 Press the soft key [F OUTPUT].


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64694EN/01 OPERATION 8. DATA INPUT/OUTPUT
- 979 - 
5 Set the file name to be output. 
Type a file name, and press the soft key [F NAME]. 
If the output file name is omitted, default output file name “TOOL_MNG.TXT” is assumed. 
6 Press the soft key [EXEC]. 
This starts outputting the tool management data, and “OUTPUT” blinks in the lower right part of the 
screen. When the read operation ends, the “OUTPUT” indication disappears. 
To cancel the output, press the soft key [CAN].


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Outputting tool management data (for 15/19-inch display unit) 
Procedure 
1 On the ALL IO screen, press the vertical soft key [NEXT PAGE] until vertical soft key [TOOL] 
appears. 
Press the vertical soft key [TOOL]. 
2 Press the EDIT switch on the machine operator’s panel. 
3 Press the horizontal soft key [F OUTPUT]. 
4 Set the file name to be output. 
Type a file name, and press the horizontal soft key [F NAME].


key: chroma:document
string_value:
If the output file name is omitted, default output file name “TOOL_MNG.TXT” is assumed. 
5 Press the horizontal soft key [EXEC]. 
This starts outputting the tool management data, and “OUTPUT” blinks in the lower right part of the 
screen. When the read operation ends, the “OUTPUT” indication disappears. 
To cancel the output, press the horizontal soft key [CAN]. 
Inputting magazine data (for 8.4/10.4-inch display unit) 
Procedure 
1 Press the soft key [MAGAZINE] on the ALL IO screen.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
2 Press the EDIT switch on the machine operator’s panel. 
3 Press the soft key [(OPRT)]. 
4 Press the soft key [N INPUT]. 
5 Set the name of the file that you want to input. 
Type a file name, and press the soft key [F NAME]. 
If the input file name is omitted, default input file name “MAGAZINE.TXT” is assumed. 
6 Press the soft key [EXEC]. 
This starts reading the magazine data, and “INPUT” blinks in the lower right part of the screen.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
When the read operation ends, the “INPUT” indication disappears. 
To cancel the input of the program, press the soft key [CAN]. 
Inputting magazine data (for 15/19-inch display unit) 
Procedure 
1 On the ALL IO screen, press the vertical soft key [NEXT PAGE] until vertical soft key 
[MAGAZINE] appears. 
Press the vertical soft key [MAGAZINE]. 
2 Press the EDIT switch on the machine operator’s panel. 
3 Press the horizontal soft key [N INPUT]. 
4 Set the name of the file that you want to input.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Type a file name, and press the horizontal soft key [F NAME]. 
If the input file name is omitted, default input file name “MAGAZINE.TXT” is assumed. 
5 Press the horizontal soft key [EXEC]. 
This starts reading the magazine data, and “INPUT” blinks in the lower right part of the screen. 
When the read operation ends, the “INPUT” indication disappears. 
To cancel the input of the program, press the horizontal soft key [CAN].


key: chroma:document
string_value:
8. DATA INPUT/OUTPUT OPERATION B-64694EN/01
- 980 - 
Outputting magazine data (for 8.4/10.4-inch display unit) 
Procedure 
1 Press the soft key [MAGAZINE] on the ALL IO screen. 
2 Press the EDIT switch on the machine operator’s panel. 
3 Press the soft key [(OPRT)]. 
4 Press the soft key [F OUTPUT]. 
5 Set the file name to be output. 
Type a file name, and press the soft key [F NAME]. 
If the file name is omitted, default file name “MAGAZINE.TXT” is assumed. 
6 Press the soft key [EXEC].


key: chroma:document
string_value:
6 Press the soft key [EXEC]. 
This starts outputting the magazine data, and “OUTPUT” blinks in the lower right part of the screen. 
When the read operation ends, the “OUTPUT” indication disappears. 
To cancel the output, press the soft key [CAN]. 
Outputting magazine data (for 15/19-inch display unit) 
Procedure 
1 On the ALL IO screen, press the vertical soft key [NEXT PAGE] until vertical soft key 
[MAGAZINE] appears. 
Press the vertical soft key [MAGAZINE].


key: chroma:document
string_value:
2 Press the EDIT switch on the machine operator’s panel. 
3 Press the horizontal soft key [F OUTPUT]. 
4 Set the file name to be output. 
Type a file name, and press the horizontal soft key [F NAME]. 
If the file name is omitted, default file name “MAGAZINE.TXT” is assumed. 
5 Press the horizontal soft key [EXEC]. 
This starts outputting the magazine data, and “OUTPUT” blinks in the lower right part of the screen. 
When the read operation ends, the “OUTPUT” indication disappears.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
To cancel the output, press the horizontal soft key [CAN]. 
Inputting tool life status name data (for 8.4/10.4-inch display unit) 
Procedure 
1 Press the soft key [STATUS] on the ALL IO screen. 
2 Press the EDIT switch on the machine operator’s panel. 
3 Press the soft key [(OPRT)]. 
4 Press the soft key [N INPUT]. 
5 Set the name of the file that you want to input. 
Type a file name, and press the soft key [F NAME].


key: chroma:document
string_value:
If the input file name is omitted, default input file name “STATUS.TXT” is assumed. 
6 Press the soft key [EXEC]. 
This starts reading the tool life status name data, and “INPUT” blinks in the lower right part of the 
screen. When the read operation ends, the “INPUT” indication disappears. 
To cancel the input of the program, press the soft key [CAN]. 
Inputting tool life status name data (for 15/19-inch display unit) 
Procedure


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Procedure 
1 On the ALL IO screen, press the vertical soft key [NEXT PAGE] until vertical soft key [STATUS] 
appears. 
Press the vertical soft key [STATUS]. 
2 Press the EDIT switch on the machine operator’s panel. 
3 Press the horizontal soft key [N INPUT].


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64694EN/01 OPERATION 8. DATA INPUT/OUTPUT
- 981 - 
4 Set the name of the file that you want to input. 
Type a file name, and press the horizontal soft key [F NAME]. 
If the input file name is omitted, default input file name “STATUS.TXT” is assumed. 
5 Press the horizontal soft key [EXEC]. 
This starts reading the tool life status name data, and “INPUT” blinks in the lower right part of the 
screen. When the read operation ends, the “INPUT” indication disappears.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
To cancel the input of the program, press the horizontal soft key [CAN]. 
Outputting tool life status name data (for 8.4/10.4-inch display unit) 
Procedure 
1 Press the soft key [STATUS] on the ALL IO screen. 
2 Press the EDIT switch on the machine operator’s panel. 
3 Press the soft key [(OPRT)]. 
4 Press the soft key [F OUTPUT]. 
5 Set the file name to be output. 
Type a file name, and press the soft key [F NAME]. 
If the file name is omitted, default file name “STATUS.TXT” is assumed.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
6 Press the soft key [EXEC]. 
This starts outputting the tool life status name data, and “OUTPUT” blinks in the lower right part of 
the screen. When the read operation ends, the “OUTPUT” indication disappears. 
To cancel the output, press the soft key [CAN]. 
Outputting tool life status name data (for 15/19-inch display unit) 
Procedure 
1 On the ALL IO screen, press the vertical soft key [NEXT PAGE] until vertical soft key [STATUS] 
appears. 
Press the vertical soft key [STATUS].


key: chroma:document
string_value:
2 Press the EDIT switch on the machine operator’s panel. 
3 Press the horizontal soft key [F OUTPUT]. 
4 Set the file name to be output. 
Type a file name, and press the horizontal soft key [F NAME]. 
If the file name is omitted, default file name “STATUS.TXT” is assumed. 
5 Press the horizontal soft key [EXEC]. 
This starts outputting the tool life status name data, and “OUTPUT” blinks in the lower right part of 
the screen. When the read operation ends, the “OUTPUT” indication disappears.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
To cancel the output, press the horizontal soft key [CAN]. 
Inputting name data of customize data (for 8.4/10.4-inch display unit) 
Procedure 
1 Press the soft key [CUSTOM] on the ALL IO screen. 
2 Press the EDIT switch on the machine operator’s panel. 
3 Press the soft key [(OPRT)]. 
4 Press the soft key [N INPUT]. 
5 Set the name of the file that you want to input. 
Type a file name, and press the soft key [F NAME].


key: chroma:document
string_value:
If the input file name is omitted, default input file name “CUSTOMIZ.TXT” is assumed. 
6 Press the soft key [EXEC]. 
This starts reading the name data of customize data, and “INPUT” blinks in the lower right part of 
the screen. When the read operation ends, the “INPUT” indication disappears. 
To cancel the input of the program, press the soft key [CAN].


key: chroma:document
string_value:
8. DATA INPUT/OUTPUT OPERATION B-64694EN/01
- 982 - 
Inputting name data of customize data (for 15/19-inch display unit) 
Procedure 
1 On the ALL IO screen, press the vertical soft key [NEXT PAGE] until vertical soft key [CUSTOM] 
appears. 
Press the vertical soft key [CUSTOM]. 
2 Press the EDIT switch on the machine operator’s panel. 
3 Press the horizontal soft key [N INPUT]. 
4 Set the name of the file that you want to input. 
Type a file name, and press the horizontal soft key [F NAME].


key: chroma:document
string_value:
If the input file name is omitted, default input file name “CUSTOMIZ.TXT” is assumed. 
5 Press the horizontal soft key [EXEC]. 
This starts reading the name data of customize data, and “INPUT” blinks in the lower right part of 
the screen. When the read operation ends, the “INPUT” indication disappears. 
To cancel the input of the program, press the horizontal soft key [CAN]. 
Outputting name data of customize data (for 8.4/10.4-inch display unit) 
Procedure


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Procedure 
1 Press the soft key [CUSTOM] on the ALL IO screen. 
2 Press the EDIT switch on the machine operator’s panel. 
3 Press the soft key [(OPRT)]. 
4 Press the soft key [F OUTPUT]. 
5 Set the file name to be output. 
Type a file name, and press the soft key [F NAME]. 
If the file name is omitted, default file name “CUSTOMIZ.TXT” is assumed. 
6 Press the soft key [EXEC]. 
This starts outputting the name data of customize data, and “OUTPUT” blinks in the lower right part


key: chroma:document
string_value:
of the screen. When the read operation ends, the “OUTPUT” indication disappears. 
To cancel the output, press the soft key [CAN]. 
Outputting name data of customize data (for 15/19-inch display unit) 
Procedure 
1 On the ALL IO screen, press the vertical soft key [NEXT PAGE] until vertical soft key [CUSTOM] 
appears. 
Press the vertical soft key [CUSTOM]. 
2 Press the EDIT switch on the machine operator’s panel. 
3 Press the horizontal soft key [F OUTPUT]. 
4 Set the file name to be output.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Type a file name, and press the horizontal soft key [F NAME]. 
If the file name is omitted, default file name “CUSTOMIZ.TXT” is assumed. 
5 Press the horizontal soft key [EXEC]. 
This starts outputting the name data of customize data, and “OUTPUT” blinks in the lower right part 
of the screen. When the read operation ends, the “OUTPUT” indication disappears. 
To cancel the output, press the horizontal soft key [CAN]. 
8.3.10 Inputting and Outputting All Tool Management Data at a Time


key: chroma:document
string_value:
All data used by the tool management function is classified into the following two types: “all tool data” 
and “all custom data” and each type of data is input and output at a time on the ALL IO screen.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64694EN/01 OPERATION 8. DATA INPUT/OUTPUT
- 983 - 
Explanation 
 - Input/output data 
Each type of data of the tool management function is input from and output to an external input/output 
device. The following tables list the types of output data and the data output order.
Table 8.3.10 (a) All tool data 
Output order Output data 
1 Tool geometry data 
2 Tool management data 
3 Magazine management table 
4 Magazine property data 
5 Pot property data 
6 Tool offset data


key: chroma:document
string_value:
6 Tool offset data 
7 Tool geometry size data 
Table 8.3.10 (b) All custom data 
Output order Output data 
1 Name data of customize data 
2 Tool life status name data 
3 Customize data displayed as tool management data 
4 Spindle and waiting position name data 
5 Decimal point position data of customize data 
6 Removal reason data 
7 Number of decimal places of magazine property customize data 
8 Number of decimal places of pot property customize data


key: chroma:document
string_value:
9 Name data of magazine property customize data 
10 Name data of pot property customize data 
11 Name data of tool type numbers 
NOTE 
1 For a multi-path system, place all paths in the EDIT mode before inputting and 
outputting data. 
2 After the following tool management data is input normally, turn the power off: 
- Customize data displayed as tool management data 
- Decimal point position data of customize data 
- Number of decimal places of magazine property customize data


key: chroma:document
string_value:
- Number of decimal places of pot property customize data 
3 If a target tool is registered in a magazine and interferes with other tools in 
registration or modification of tool geometry data, alarm PS5360, ”TOOL 
INTERFERENCE CHECK ERROR” is issued. In this case, erase the tool 
geometry data, tool management data, and tool magazine table data in the NC 
or edit input data, then input all data at a time. 
4 If a function related to input tool management data is disabled or the input data


key: chroma:document
string_value:
format is invalid, input operation is stopped. 
5 When creating or editing input data, do not change the order in which data is 
output at a time. 
6 The tool offset data output using this function cannot be used by the 
programmable data input function. 
7 For a multi-path system, do not input data output for another path.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
8. DATA INPUT/OUTPUT OPERATION B-64694EN/01
- 984 - 
Inputting all tool data at a time (for 8.4/10.4-inch display unit) 
Procedure 
1 Press the soft key [ALL TOOL] on the ALL IO screen. 
2 Press the EDIT switch on the machine operator’s panel. 
3 Press the soft key [(OPRT)]. 
4 Press the soft key [N INPUT]. 
5 Set the name of the file that you want to input. 
6 Type a file name, and press the soft key [F NAME].


key: chroma:document
string_value:
If the input file name is omitted, default input file name “AL_TLMGR.TXT” is assumed. 
7 Press the soft key [EXEC]. 
This starts reading the data, and “INPUT” blinks in the lower right part of the screen. 
When the read operation ends, the “INPUT” indication disappears. 
To cancel the input of the program, press the soft key [CAN]. 
Inputting all tool data at a time (for 15/19-inch display unit) 
Procedure


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Procedure 
1 On the ALL IO screen, press the vertical soft key [NEXT PAGE] until vertical soft key [ALL 
TOOL] appears. 
2 Press the vertical soft key [ALL TOOL]. 
3 Press the EDIT switch on the machine operator’s panel. 
4 Press the horizontal soft key [N INPUT]. 
5 Set the name of the file that you want to input. 
6 Type a file name, and press the soft key [F NAME]. 
If the input file name is omitted, default input file name “AL_TLMGR.TXT” is assumed. 
7 Press the soft key [EXEC].


key: chroma:document
string_value:
7 Press the soft key [EXEC]. 
This starts reading the data, and “INPUT” blinks in the lower right part of the screen. 
When the read operation ends, the “INPUT” indication disappears. 
To cancel the input of the program, press the soft key [CAN]. 
Outputting all tool data at a time (for 8.4/10.4-inch display unit) 
Procedure 
1 Press the soft key [ALL TOOL] on the ALL IO screen. 
2 Press the EDIT switch on the machine operator’s panel. 
3 Press the soft key [(OPRT)].


key: chroma:document
string_value:
4 Press the soft key [F OUTPUT]. 
5 Set the file name to be output. 
6 Type a file name, and press the soft key [F NAME]. 
If the input file name is omitted, default output file name “AL_TLMGR.TXT” is assumed. 
7 Press the soft key [EXEC]. 
This starts outputting the data, and “OUTPUT” blinks in the lower right part of the screen. 
When the write operation ends, the “OUTPUT” indication disappears. 
To cancel the output, press the horizontal soft key [CAN].


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Outputting all tool data at a time (for 15/19-inch display unit) 
Procedure 
1 On the ALL IO screen, press the vertical soft key [NEXT PAGE] until vertical soft key [ALL 
TOOL] appears. 
2 Press the vertical soft key [ALL TOOL]. 
3 Press the EDIT switch on the machine operator’s panel. 
4 Press the horizontal soft key [F OUTPUT]. 
5 Set the file name to be output.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64694EN/01 OPERATION 8. DATA INPUT/OUTPUT
- 985 - 
6 Type a file name, and press the horizontal soft key [F NAME]. 
If the input file name is omitted, default output file name “AL_TLMGR.TXT” is assumed. 
7 Press the horizontal soft key [EXEC]. 
This starts outputting the data, and “OUTPUT” blinks in the lower right part of the screen. 
When the write operation ends, the “OUTPUT” indication disappears. 
To cancel the output, press the horizontal soft key [CAN].


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Inputting all custom data at a time (for 8.4/10.4-inch display unit) 
Procedure 
1 Press the soft key [ALL CUSTOM] on the ALL IO screen. 
2 Press the EDIT switch on the machine operator’s panel. 
3 Press the soft key [(OPRT)]. 
4 Press the soft key [N INPUT]. 
5 Set the name of the file that you want to input. 
6 Type a file name, and press the soft key [F NAME]. 
If the input file name is omitted, default input file name “AL_TLCSM.TXT” is assumed. 
7 Press the soft key [EXEC].


key: chroma:document
string_value:
7 Press the soft key [EXEC]. 
This starts reading the data, and “INPUT” blinks in the lower right part of the screen. 
When the read operation ends, the “INPUT” indication disappears. 
To cancel the input of the program, press the soft key [CAN]. 
Inputting all custom data at a time (for 15/19-inch display unit) 
Procedure 
1 On the ALL IO screen, press the vertical soft key [NEXT PAGE] until vertical soft key [ALL 
CUSTOM] appears. 
2 Press the vertical soft key [ALL CUSTOM].


key: chroma:document
string_value:
3 Press the EDIT switch on the machine operator’s panel. 
4 Press the horizontal soft key [N INPUT]. 
5 Set the name of the file that you want to input. 
6 Type a file name, and press the soft key [F NAME]. 
If the input file name is omitted, default input file name “AL_TLCSM.TXT” is assumed. 
7 Press the soft key [EXEC]. 
This starts reading the data, and “INPUT” blinks in the lower right part of the screen. 
When the read operation ends, the “INPUT” indication disappears.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
To cancel the input of the program, press the soft key [CAN]. 
Outputting all custom data at a time (for 8.4/10.4-inch display unit) 
Procedure 
1 Press the soft key [ALL CUSTOM] on the ALL IO screen. 
2 Press the EDIT switch on the machine operator’s panel. 
3 Press the soft key [(OPRT)]. 
4 Press the soft key [F OUTPUT]. 
5 Set the file name to be output. 
6 Type a file name, and press the soft key [F NAME].


key: chroma:document
string_value:
If the input file name is omitted, default output file name “AL_TLCSM.TXT” is assumed. 
7 Press the soft key [EXEC]. 
This starts outputting the data, and “OUTPUT” blinks in the lower right part of the screen. 
When the write operation ends, the “OUTPUT” indication disappears. 
To cancel the output, press the horizontal soft key [CAN].


key: chroma:document
string_value:
8. DATA INPUT/OUTPUT OPERATION B-64694EN/01
- 986 - 
Outputting all custom data at a time (for 15/19-inch display unit) 
Procedure 
1 On the ALL IO screen, press the vertical soft key [NEXT PAGE] until vertical soft key [ALL 
CUSTOM] appears. 
2 Press the vertical soft key [ALL CUSTOM]. 
3 Press the EDIT switch on the machine operator’s panel. 
4 Press the horizontal soft key [F OUTPUT]. 
5 Set the file name to be output. 
6 Type a file name, and press the horizontal soft key [F NAME].


key: chroma:document
string_value:
If the input file name is omitted, default output file name “AL_TLCSM.TXT” is assumed. 
7 Press the horizontal soft key [EXEC]. 
This starts outputting the data, and “OUTPUT” blinks in the lower right part of the screen. 
When the write operation ends, the “OUTPUT” indication disappears. 
To cancel the output, press the horizontal soft key [CAN]. 
8.3.11 Inputting and Outputting Workpiece Setting Error 
Compensation Value


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Compensation Value 
Workpiece setting error compensation value can be input and output using the ALL IO screen. 
Inputting workpiece setting error compensation value (for 8.4/10.4-inch display unit) 
Procedure 
1 Press the soft key [WORK SET ER] on the ALL IO screen. 
2 Press the EDIT switch on the machine operator’s panel or enter state emergency stop. 
3 Press the soft key [(OPRT)]. 
4 Press the soft key [N INPUT]. 
5 Set the name of the file that you want to input.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Type a file name, and press the soft key [F NAME]. 
If the input file name is omitted, default input file name “WSEC_VAL.TXT” is assumed. 
6 Press the soft key [EXEC]. 
This starts reading the workpiece setting error compensation value, and “INPUT” blinks in the lower 
right part of the screen. When the read operation ends, the “INPUT” indication disappears. 
To cancel the input of the program, press the soft key [CAN].


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Inputting workpiece setting error compensation value (for 15/19-inch display unit) 
Procedure 
1 On the ALL IO screen, press the vertical soft key [NEXT PAGE] until vertical soft key [WORK 
SET ER] appears. 
Press the vertical soft key [WORK SET ER]. 
2 Press the EDIT switch on the machine operator’s panel or enter state emergency stop. 
3 Press the horizontal soft key [N INPUT]. 
4 Set the name of the file that you want to input. 
Type a file name, and press the horizontal soft key [F NAME].


key: chroma:document
string_value:
If the input file name is omitted, default input file name “WSEC_VAL.TXT” is assumed. 
5 Press the horizontal soft key [EXEC]. 
This starts reading the workpiece setting error compensation value, and “INPUT” blinks in the lower 
right part of the screen. When the read operation ends, the “INPUT” indication disappears. 
To cancel the input of the program, press the horizontal soft key [CAN].


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64694EN/01 OPERATION 8. DATA INPUT/OUTPUT
- 987 - 
Outputting workpiece setting error compensation value (for 8.4/10.4-inch display 
unit) 
Procedure 
1 Press the soft key [WORK SET ER] on the ALL IO screen. 
2 Press the EDIT switch on the machine operator’s panel or enter state emergency stop. 
3 Press the soft key [(OPRT)]. 
4 Press the soft key [F OUTPUT]. 
5 Set the file name to be output. 
Type a file name, and press the soft key [F NAME].


key: chroma:document
string_value:
If the input file name is omitted, default output file name “WSEC_VAL.TXT” is assumed. 
6 Press the soft key [EXEC]. 
This starts outputting the workpiece setting error compensation value, and “OUTPUT” blinks in the 
lower right part of the screen. When the write operation ends, the “OUTPUT” indication disappears. 
To cancel the output, press the soft key [CAN]. 
7 To cancel the output, press the soft key [CAN]. 
Outputting workpiece setting error compensation value (for 15/19-inch display unit)


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Procedure 
1 On the ALL IO screen, press the vertical soft key [NEXT PAGE] until vertical soft key [WORK 
SET ER] appears. 
Press the vertical soft key [WORK SET ER]. 
2 Press the EDIT switch on the machine operator’s panel or enter state emergency stop. 
3 Press the horizontal soft key [F OUTPUT]. 
4 Set the file name to be output. 
Type a file name, and press the horizontal soft key [F NAME]. 
If the input file name is omitted, default output file name “WSEC_VAL.TXT” is assumed.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
5 Press the horizontal soft key [EXEC]. 
This starts outputting the workpiece setting error compensation value, and “OUTPUT” blinks in the 
lower right part of the screen. When the write operation ends, the “OUTPUT” indication disappears. 
To cancel the output, press the horizontal soft key [CAN]. 
8.3.12 File Format and Error Messages 
Explanation 
 - File format 
All files that are read from and written to an external device are of text format. The format is described 
below.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
below. 
A file starts with % or LF, followed by the actual data. A file always ends with %. In a read operation, 
data between the first % and the next LF is skipped. Each block ends with an LF, not a semicolon (;). 
- LF: 0A (hexadecimal) of ASCII code 
- When a file containing lowercase letters, kana characters, and several special characters (such as $, \, 
and !) is read, those letters and characters are ignored. 
Example) 
 % 
 O0001(MEMORY CARD SAMPLE FILE) 
 G17 G49 G97


key: chroma:document
string_value:
G17 G49 G97 
 G92 X-11.3 Y2.33 
 : 
 : 
 M30 
 % 
- ASCII code is used for input/output, regardless of the setting parameter (ISO/EIA).


key: chroma:document
string_value:
8. DATA INPUT/OUTPUT OPERATION B-64694EN/01
- 988 - 
- Bit 3 (NCR) of parameter No. 0100 can be used to specify whether the end of block code (EOB) is 
output as "LF" only, or as "LF, CR, CR." 
Limitation 
 - Memory card specification 
Use memory cards that comply with PCMCIA Ver2.0 or JEIDA Ver4.1. 
 - Attribute memory 
Memory cards that have no attribute memory or contain no device information in the attribute memory 
cannot be used. 
 - Flash ROM card


key: chroma:document
string_value:
- Flash ROM card 
Flash ROM cards can be used for reading only. 
8.4 EMBEDDED ETHERNET OPERATIONS 
8.4.1 Host File List Display 
 CAUTION 
 Before performing FTP communication using the Embedded Ethernet for the first 
time, consult with your network administrator, carefully set a network address 
and other items, and conduct communication tests thoroughly. Any error in 
settings such as a network address setting can lead to an adverse influence


key: chroma:document
string_value:
such as a communication failure on the entire network. 
 Be very careful about any communication failure. If the Ethernet is used on a 
network involves with a communication failure, a communication failure 
intermittently occurs in the Ethernet, which may cause a CNC system error. 
NOTE 
1 With the FTP File Transfer function (FTP client), a single CNC can connect only 
one FTP server. 
2 When a lot of files are registered in the host computer, the display processing of


key: chroma:document
string_value:
host file list display might become slow. In this case, please divide the folder that 
registers the files. 
Host file list display (for 8.4/10.4-inch display unit) 
A list of the files held on the host computer is displayed. 
Procedure 
1 Press the function key . 
2 Press the soft key [FOLDER]. The program list screen appears. (If the soft key does not appear, 
press the continuous menu key .) 
3 Press the soft key [(OPRT)]. 
4 Press the soft key [DEVICE CHANGE].


key: chroma:document
string_value:
5 Press the soft key [EMB ETHER], and the EMBEDDED ETHERNET HOST FILE LIST screen 
appears. When DNC operation from the Embedded Ethernet is valid (bit 1 (EDE) of parameter is 1), 
M198 OPE FOLDER and DNC OPE FILE are display.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64694EN/01 OPERATION 8. DATA INPUT/OUTPUT
- 989 - 
Fig. 8.4.1 (a) Embedded Ethernet host file list screen 
Fig. 8.4.1 (b) Embedded Ethernet host file list screen 
(DNC operation from the Embedded Ethernet is valid) 
NOTE 
1 When using the FTP file transfer function, check that the valid device is the 
embedded Ethernet port. 
 The three conditions below determine a connection destination on the host file list 
screen:


key: chroma:document
string_value:
screen: 
(1) Check that the valid device is the embedded Ethernet port. Make a selection 
in "DEVICE SELECTION" on the Ethernet setting screen. 
(2) Set connection destinations on the FTP transfer screen. The FTP transfer 
screen is displayed by pressing soft key [FTP TRANS] on the Ethernet setting 
screen. 
(3) A host computer can be selected from connection destinations 1, 2, and 3. 
Make a selection according to soft key [HOST CHANGE] described later.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
8. DATA INPUT/OUTPUT OPERATION B-64694EN/01
- 990 - 
6 When a list of files is larger than one page, the screen display can be switched using the page keys 
. 
7 Press the soft key [REFRESH] to update the screen display. 
8 Press the soft key [DETAIL OFF] to display the host file list (file names only) screen. Press the soft 
key [DETAIL ON] to display the host file list (detail) screen. 
9 When selecting a folder with cursor and pressing the MDI key , the selected folder is changed


key: chroma:document
string_value:
to the new current folder. 
Host file list display (for 15/19-inch display unit) 
A list of the files held on the host computer is displayed. 
Procedure 
1 Press the function key . 
2 Press the vertical soft key [FOLDER]. The program list screen appears. 
3 Press the continuous menu key until horizontal soft key [DEVICE CHANGE] appears. 
 Press the horizontal soft key [DEVICE CHANGE]. 
4 Press the horizontal soft key [EMB ETHER], and the EMBEDDED ETHERNET HOST FILE LIST


key: chroma:document
string_value:
screen appears. When DNC operation from the Embedded Ethernet is valid (bit 1 (EDE) of 
parameter is 1), M198 OPE FOLDER and DNC OPE FILE are display. 
Fig. 8.4.1 (c) Embedded Ethernet host file list screen


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64694EN/01 OPERATION 8. DATA INPUT/OUTPUT
- 991 - 
Fig. 8.4.1 (d) Embedded Ethernet host file list screen 
(DNC operation from the Embedded Ethernet is valid) 
NOTE 
1 When using the FTP file transfer function, check that the valid device is the 
embedded Ethernet port. 
 The three conditions below determine a connection destination on the host file list 
screen: 
(1) Check that the valid device is the embedded Ethernet port. Make a selection


key: chroma:document
string_value:
in "DEVICE SELECTION" on the Ethernet setting screen. 
(2) Set connection destinations on the FTP transfer screen. The FTP transfer 
screen is displayed by pressing soft key [FTP TRANS] on the Ethernet setting 
screen. 
(3) A host computer can be selected from connection destinations 1, 2, and 3. 
Make a selection according to soft key [HOST CHANGE] described later. 
2 File names including 2-bytes characters cannot be displayed correctly.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
5 When a list of files is larger than one page, the screen display can be switched using the page keys 
. 
6 Press the horizontal soft key [REFRESH] to update the screen display. 
7 Press the horizontal soft key [DETAIL OFF] to display the host file list (file names only) screen. 
Press the horizontal soft key [DETAIL ON] to display the host file list (detail) screen. 
8 When selecting a folder with cursor and pressing the MDI key , the selected folder is changed 
to the new current folder.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
8. DATA INPUT/OUTPUT OPERATION B-64694EN/01
- 992 - 
Display item (common to 8.4/10.4/15/19-inch display units) 
M198 OPE FOLDER 
Display a folder for M198-based subprogram calling, when external device subprogram call from the 
embedded Ethernet is valid. 
DNC OPE FILE 
Display a file name used when DNC operation is performed, when DNC operation from the Embedded 
Ethernet is valid. 
AVAILABLE DEVICE 
"EMBEDDED" or "PCMCIA" is displayed. 
CONNECT HOST


key: chroma:document
string_value:
CONNECT HOST 
The currently selected connection host number and host name are displayed. 
REGISTERED PROGRAM 
The number of files registered in the work folder of the connected host is displayed. Up to 8 digits can be 
displayed. 
CURRENT FOLDER 
The current folder name of the connected host is displayed. 
If the folder-path is long compared with the display-item, characters: “…” and only the first and last ten 
letters of the folder name are displayed. 
FILE LIST


key: chroma:document
string_value:
FILE LIST 
There is no distinction between file names and folder names. 
Although the maximum number of displayed characters is 127, characters are displayed as far as they can 
be displayed in one line. 
Operation list (common to 8.4/10.4/15/19-inch display units) 
DNC SET 
Specifies the file for which to perform DNC operation, when DNC operation from the Embedded 
Ethernet is valid. 
M198 SET 
Specifies the folder for which to perform M198 subprogram calling, when external device subprogram


key: chroma:document
string_value:
call from the embedded Ethernet is valid. 
DETAIL ON, DETAIL OFF 
The screen display can be switched between the display of file names only and the display of details. 
REFRESH 
Display data can be updated. 
F INPUT 
A file can be input from the host computer to program memory. This item is displayed only when 9 is set 
as the I/O device number of the CNC. 
F OUTPUT 
A file can be output from program memory to the host computer. This item is displayed only when 9 is


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64694EN/01 OPERATION 8. DATA INPUT/OUTPUT
- 993 - 
DELETE 
A folder or file can be deleted from the host computer. 
RENAME 
A file or folder on the host computer can be renamed. 
CREATE FOLDER 
A folder can be created on the host computer. 
HOST CHANGE 
The connected host can be changed. 
8.4.2 FTP File Transfer Function 
The operation of the FTP file transfer function is described below. 
NC program input (for 8.4/10.4-inch display unit)


key: chroma:document
string_value:
A file (NC program) stored on the host computer can be input into program memory. 
 CAUTION 
 If bit 2 (REP) of parameter No.3201 is set to 1, when an NC program having the 
same file name as an NC program to be input is already present in program 
memory, the existing NC program is overwritten. 
NOTE 
 NC programs cannot be input simultaneously with an NC program output. 
Procedure 
1 Display the EMBEDDED ETHERNET HOST FILE LIST screen. 
2 Press the EDIT switch on the machine operator’s panel.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
3 Press the soft key [(OPRT)]. 
4 Press the continuous menu key until soft key [F INPUT] appears. 
Press the soft key [F INPUT]. 
5 Position the cursor on the file to input, and press [F GET] or type the file name to input. 
Press the soft key [F SET]. 
If the input file name is omitted, default input file name “ALL-PROG.TXT” is assumed. 
6 Type the program name, and press the soft key [P SET]. 
For an explanation of the operations to be performed if an input file name [F SET] and an input


key: chroma:document
string_value:
program name [P SET] are omitted, see the Table 8.4.2 (a). 
7 Press the soft key [EXEC]. 
This starts reading the program, and “INPUT” blinks in the lower right part of the screen. When the 
read operation ends, the “INPUT” indication disappears. 
To cancel the input of the program, press the soft key [CAN]. 
Table 8.4.2 (a) 
[F SET] [P SET] Input file name Input program Input program name 
BLANK BLANK ALL-PROG.TXT All programs in ALL-PROG.TXT File name at the time the file is saved


key: chroma:document
string_value:
BLANK INPUT ALL-PROG.TXT First program in ALL-PROG.TXT Program name set with [P SET] 
INPUT BLANK File name set 
with [F SET] 
All programs in the file specified 
with [F SET] File name at the time the file is saved 
INPUT INPUT File name set 
with [F SET] 
First program in the file specified 
with [F SET] Program name set with [P SET]


key: chroma:document
string_value:
8. DATA INPUT/OUTPUT OPERATION B-64694EN/01
- 994 - 
NC program input (for 15/19-inch display unit) 
A file (NC program) stored on the host computer can be input into program memory. 
 CAUTION 
 If bit 2 (REP) of parameter No.3201 is set to 1, when an NC program having the 
same file name as an NC program to be input is already present in program 
memory, the existing NC program is overwritten. 
NOTE 
 NC programs cannot be input simultaneously with an NC program output. 
Procedure


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Procedure 
1 Display the EMBEDDED ETHERNET HOST FILE LIST screen. 
2 Press the EDIT switch on the machine operator’s panel. 
3 Press the continuous menu key until horizontal soft key [F INPUT] appears. 
Press the horizontal soft key [F INPUT]. 
4 Position the cursor on the file to input, and press [F GET] or type the file name to input. 
Press the horizontal soft key [F SET]. 
If the input file name is omitted, default input file name “ALL-PROG.TXT” is assumed.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
5 Type the program name, and press the horizontal soft key [P SET]. 
For an explanation of the operations to be performed if an input file name [F SET] and an input 
program name [P SET] are omitted, see the Table 8.4.2 (b). 
6 Press the horizontal soft key [EXEC]. 
This starts reading the program, and “INPUT” blinks in the lower right part of the screen. When the 
read operation ends, the “INPUT” indication disappears. 
To cancel the input of the program, press the horizontal soft key [CAN].


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Table 8.4.2 (b) 
[F SET] [P SET] Input file name Input program Input program name 
BLANK BLANK ALL-PROG.TXT All programs in ALL-PROG.TXT File name at the time the file is saved 
BLANK INPUT ALL-PROG.TXT First program in ALL-PROG.TXT Program name set with [P SET] 
INPUT BLANK File name set 
with [F SET] 
All programs in the file specified 
with [F SET] File name at the time the file is saved 
INPUT INPUT File name set 
with [F SET] 
First program in the file specified


key: chroma:document
string_value:
with [F SET] Program name set with [P SET] 
NC program output (for 8.4/10.4-inch display unit) 
A file (NC program) stored in program memory can be output to the host computer. 
NOTE 
 NC programs cannot be output simultaneously with an NC program input. 
Procedure 
1 Display the EMBEDDED ETHERNET HOST FILE LIST screen. 
2 Press the EDIT switch on the machine operator’s panel. 
3 Press the soft key [(OPRT)]. 
4 Press the continuous menu key until soft key [F OUTPUT] appears.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Press the soft key [F OUTPUT]. 
5 Type the program name to output, and press the soft key [P SET]. To specify an output file name, 
type the output file name and press the soft key [F SET].


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64694EN/01 OPERATION 8. DATA INPUT/OUTPUT
- 995 - 
 If, in this step, no output file name or no program name is specified, all programs in the foreground 
folders are output to “ALL-PROG.TXT”. 
For an explanation of the operations to be performed if an output file name [F SET] and an output 
program name [P SET] are omitted, see the Table 8.4.2 (c). 
(For an explanation of foreground folders, see Section, “Default Folders”, and for how to change


key: chroma:document
string_value:
foreground folders, see Section, “SELECTING A DEFAULT FOLDER”) 
6 Press the soft key [EXEC]. 
This starts outputting the program, and “OUTPUT” blinks in the lower right part of the screen. 
When the read operation ends, the “OUTPUT” indication disappears. 
To cancel the output of the program, press the soft key [CAN]. 
Table 8.4.2 (c) 
[F SET] [P SET] Output file name Output program 
BLANK BLANK or (O-9999) ALL-PROG.TXT All programs in the foreground folders 
displayed in the program folder


key: chroma:document
string_value:
BLANK INPUT Program name set with [P SET] Program in the NC that is set with [P SET] 
INPUT BLANK or (O-9999) File name set with [F SET] All programs in the foreground folders 
displayed in the program folder 
INPUT INPUT File name set with [F SET] Program in the NC that is set with [P SET] 
NC program output (for 15/19-inch display unit) 
A file (NC program) stored in program memory can be output to the host computer. 
NOTE 
 NC programs cannot be output simultaneously with an NC program input.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Procedure 
1 Display the EMBEDDED ETHERNET HOST FILE LIST screen. 
2 Press the EDIT switch on the machine operator’s panel. 
3 Press the continuous menu key until horizontal soft key [F OUTPUT] appears. 
Press the horizontal soft key [F OUTPUT]. 
4 Type the program name to output, and press the horizontal soft key [P SET]. To specify an output 
file name, type the output file name and press the horizontal soft key [F SET].


key: chroma:document
string_value:
If, in this step, no output file name or no program name is specified, all programs in the foreground 
folders are output to “ALL-PROG.TXT”. 
For an explanation of the operations to be performed if an output file name [F SET] and an output 
program name [P SET] are omitted, see the Table 8.4.2 (d). 
(For an explanation of foreground folders, see Section, “Default Folders”, and for how to change 
foreground folders, see Section, “SELECTING A DEFAULT FOLDER”) 
5 Press the horizontal soft key [EXEC].


key: chroma:document
string_value:
This starts outputting the program, and “OUTPUT” blinks in the lower right part of the screen. 
When the read operation ends, the “OUTPUT” indication disappears. 
To cancel the output, press the horizontal soft key [CAN]. 
Table 8.4.2 (d) 
[F SET] [P SET] Output file name Output program 
BLANK BLANK or (O-9999) ALL-PROG.TXT All programs in the foreground folders 
displayed in the program folder 
BLANK INPUT Program name set with [P SET] Program in the NC that is set with [P SET]


key: chroma:document
string_value:
INPUT BLANK or (O-9999) File name set with [F SET] All programs in the foreground folders 
displayed in the program folder 
INPUT INPUT File name set with [F SET] Program in the NC that is set with [P SET]


key: chroma:document
string_value:
8. DATA INPUT/OUTPUT OPERATION B-64694EN/01
- 996 - 
8.4.3 DNC Operation File Set 
The operation of the DNC operation file set is described below. 
1 Display the embedded Ethernet host file list screen. 
2 By using cursor keys, select a file to be used for DNC operation. 
3 Press soft key [DNC SET]. 
8.4.4 M198 Folder Set 
The operation of the folder for M198-based subprogram calling set is described below. 
1 Move to the folder containing a file to be called by M198-based subprogram calling.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
2 Press soft key [M198 SET]. 
3 The specified folder 
8.5 SCREEN HARD COPY FUNCTION 
Overview 
This function converts screen information displayed on the CNC into bit map format data and output it to 
a memory card or USB memory. Once output, bit map format data can be displayed and edited on a 
personal computer. This function can be enabled by setting bit 7 (HDC) of parameter No. 3301. 
Explanation 
 - Start/cancellation methods


key: chroma:document
string_value:
- Start/cancellation methods 
The screen hard copy function is started by pressing and holding down key for five seconds. The 
function can be canceled by pressing key . 
 - Acquisition and output of screen data 
When started, the screen hard copy function starts acquiring screen data. As soon as it has acquired it, the 
function outputs bit map format data to the memory card inserted into the LCD unit. While screen data is


key: chroma:document
string_value:
being acquired, the screen remains stationary for a few seconds. Acquired screen data can be output from 
the memory card screen. Also, while screen data is being output, "OUTPUT" blinks in the status display. 
 - Screen data file names 
Bit map format screen data files created by this function are assigned the names below: 
In case of parameter bit 4(HCN) of parameter No.3301 is 0, file name starts with “HDCPY000.BMP” and 
increments the number to 999 as following.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
"HDCPY000.BMP" (Name of a file to be first output to a memory card etc. after power-on) 
"HDCPY001.BMP" (Name of a file to be second output to a memory card etc. after power-on) 
 : 
 : 
"HDCPY999.BMP" (Name of a file to be 1000 output to a memory card etc. after power-on) 
If the screen hard copy function is executed after a file with "HDCPY999.BMP" is output, the file name 
returns to "HDCPY000.BMP". However, if a file with the same file name as the one to be output when


key: chroma:document
string_value:
the screen hard copy function is executed exists on the memory card, alarm SR1973, “FILE ALREADY 
EXIST” is issued. If the capacity of the memory card is exceeded, alarm SR1962, “CARD FULL 
(MEMORY CARD)” is issued. 
In either case, screen data is not output, so that either the existing file needs to be deleted or the memory 
card needs to be replaced with a new one.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64694EN/01 OPERATION 8. DATA INPUT/OUTPUT
- 997 - 
In case of using a USB memory, if the name of a file to be output during execution of screen hard copy 
already exists in the memory, the file is overwritten. If the capacity of the USB memory is exceeded, 
alarm SR1932, “DEVICE FULL(USB MEMORY)” is issued. In this case, please delete unnecessary files 
or use a new USB memory. 
In case of parameter HCN is 1, file name id defined by the date and the execute number of screen hard


key: chroma:document
string_value:
copy function on that day as following. 
"YYMMDD00.BMP" (Name of a file to be first output to a memory card etc. on that day) 
"YYMMDD01.BMP" (Name of a file to be second output to a memory card etc. on that day) 
 : 
 : 
"YYMMDD99.BMP" (Name of a file to be 100 output to a memory card etc. on that day) 
(YY(00~99) means the year, MM(01~12) means the month and DD(01~31) means the day) 
 (Example)


key: chroma:document
string_value:
(Example) 
If screen hard copy is executed on 2013/04/17 in the first time, bit map format file is created with the 
name of “13041700.BMP”. 
If the screen hard copy function is executed after a file with “YYMMDD99.BMP” is output, the file name 
returns to "YYMMDD00.BMP". However, if a file with the same file name as the one to be output when 
the screen hard copy function is executed exists on the memory card, system searches number which does


key: chroma:document
string_value:
not exist and output the file with that number. If all number files (00~99) exist on the memory card, alarm 
SR1973, “FILE ALREADY EXIST” is issued. If the capacity of the memory card is exceeded, alarm 
SR1962, “CARD FULL (MEMORY CARD)” is issued. 
In either case, screen data is not output, so that either the existing file needs to be deleted or the memory 
card needs to be replaced with a new one.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
In case of using a USB memory, if the name of a file to be output during execution of screen hard copy 
already exists in the memory, system searches the file number which does not exist on the memory and 
output the file with that number, same as memory card. If all number files (00~99) exist in the memory, 
the file is overwritten. If the capacity of the USB memory is exceeded, alarm SR1932, “DEVICE 
FULL(USB MEMORY)” is issued. In this case, please delete unnecessary files or use a new USB


key: chroma:document
string_value:
memory. 
Limitation 
 - Screens whose hard copies cannot be made 
Hard copies of the BOOT screen, the IPL screen, and the system alarm screen cannot be made.
 - Foreground I/O devices 
During DNC operation, for example, screen data cannot be output while a foreground I/O device is in use. 
 - Canceling the hard copy function 
If the hard copy function is canceled before a hard copy is completed, an incomplete bit map file of data 
that has been output is created. 
 - CNC screen display function


key: chroma:document
string_value:
If CNC screen display function is working, the screen hard copy function is disabled. In this case, bit map 
format data can be made by screen copy function of CNC screen display function. Please refer to the 
operator’s manual of CNC screen display function. 
 - Output folder 
The screen data is output to the root folder of the memory card or the USB memory.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
8. DATA INPUT/OUTPUT OPERATION B-64694EN/01
- 998 - 
8.6 USB FUNCTION 
Overview 
Setting NC parameter No. 20 to 17 selects a USB memory as the data input/output destination. 
Basic specifications of the USB function are listed below. 
- The USB function is conforming to USB Ver. 1.0. 
- The USB function supports the FAT12, FAT16, FAT32, and VFAT file systems. 
- It can handle up to six folder levels under the root folder.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
- Up to 32 ASCII code characters (alphanumeric characters) are available for a file or folder name. 
 WARNING 
 A commercially available USB memory does not have sufficient reliability in the 
FA environment. When a part program, a parameter, etc. are input or output to a 
USB memory, those data might be damaged and there is a possibility that a 
serious accident or loss occurs. 
Therefore, set bit 0 (ISU) of parameter No.11505 to input or output data to a


key: chroma:document
string_value:
USB memory using ISO codes unless data is input using ASCII codes. 
 CAUTION 
 Do not turn off CNC or do not remove the USB memory during accessing the 
USB memory. The USB memory may be damaged. 
NOTE 
1 There is a USB memory not designed for the long preservation of data. 
Therefore, do not use a USB memory by the long preservation purpose of data, 
and back up important data to the personal computer. 
2 When empty capacity of the USB memory decreases or the number of files in


key: chroma:document
string_value:
the USB memory increases, it might take time to the input or output operation. 
In this case, input or output after deleting an unnecessary file in the USB 
memory. 
3 Any USB memory that is not physically formatted cannot be formatted on the 
CNC. Format a USB memory to be used for the first time with FAT or FAT32 
without specifying the Quick Format option on the personal computer. 
Restrictions 
There are the following restrictions on the USB function.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
- Use a USB memory conforming to USB Ver. 1.0. 
NOTE 
 The USB memory that has the capacity less than a hundred GB on the market 
can be used. However, the operation of all USB memories on the market cannot 
be guaranteed. There is a USB memory with slow access speed, and even if the 
USB memories of the same model that are made by the same manufacturer are 
used, the operation might be different. 
Before using a USB memory, fully check its operation.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
- Only one USB memory can be recognized. (No USB hub can be recognized.) 
- The maximum number of files and folders in a folder is 512.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64694EN/01 OPERATION 8. DATA INPUT/OUTPUT
- 999 - 
- A non-ASCII character (alphanumeric character) is not used in a file or folder name. 
- DNC operation cannot be performed using a program in a USB memory. 
- Schedule operation cannot be performed using a program in a USB memory. 
- A program in a USB memory device cannot be called using an external subprogram call (M198). 
- "Memory Card Program Operation/Editing" cannot be applied to a USB memory. 
8.7 NC DATA OUTPUT FUNCTION 
Overview


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Overview 
This function outputs the following various data into memory card or USB memory by one operation. 
- SRAM data 
- User files (made by user such as PMC ladder) 
- Text data (Parameter, program, and so on) 
This function enables to back up the system data easily. 
Moreover, the contents of SRAM data can be confirmed immediately because both SRAM data and text 
data are output. 
NC data output signal ALLO is set to “1” from the beginning to the end of outputting text data. 
NOTE


key: chroma:document
string_value:
NOTE 
1 When USB memory is used, set root folder as data output destination. 
2 It takes a time to output data. 
3 The output file name is a default file name. If a file with the same name already 
exists in the external I/O device, the file is overwritten. It is recommended to 
clear the external I/O device before using this function. 
8.7.1 All Data Output Screen 
This function outputs on all data output screen of ALL IO.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
To display all data output screen, set bit 0 (BOP) of parameter No.313 to 1. 
Fig 8.7.1 All data output screen 
Displaying all data output screen 
Procedure 
1 Press the soft key [ALL DATA] on the ALL IO screen.
Explanation 
The following items are displayed on all data output screen 
- File information of external I/O device 
 File number, name, size (byte) and creation date are displayed.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
8. DATA INPUT/OUTPUT OPERATION B-64694EN/01
- 1000 - 
- Message 
 Confirmation message and progress bar are displayed. 
- Device name 
 The name of I/O device (memory card or USB memory) selected by parameter (No.20) is displayed. 
 If the other devices are selected, “ILLEGAL” is displayed. 
8.7.1.1 Output operation 
For output operation of this function, cancel emergency stop state and switch to EDIT mode. 
And, set the following parameters.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
- Parameter (No.20) = 4 or 17 Memory card: 4, USB memory: 17 
In multi-path system, set the following parameter. 
- Bit 0 (MDP) of parameter No.138 = 1 A path number is added to the extensions of input/output files. 
Moreover, when bit 0 (IO4) of parameter No.110 is 1 (separate control of I/O channel numbers is 
performed), set the following parameters. 
- Parameter (No.20) = Parameter (No.21) and Parameter (No.22) = Parameter (No.23) 
Output operation of NC data output function 
Procedure


key: chroma:document
string_value:
Procedure 
1 Display all data output screen. 
2 Press the soft key [(OPRT)]. 
3 Press the soft key [F OUTPUT]. 
 The message “THIS OPERATION NEEDS POWER OFF. AND SAME NAME FILE IS 
OVERWRITTEN. EXECUTE?” is displayed in message area. To cancel the output, press the soft 
key [CAN]. 
4 Press the soft key [EXEC]. 
 This starts outputting text data and NC data output signal ALLO is set to “1”. 
 The key operation is invalid while outputting data. (Example: If the function key is pressed,


key: chroma:document
string_value:
it is not switched to the program screen.) 
The progress bar shows the progress report of output. 
Output file name 
File name is blinked. 
Progress bar 
Show the progress report of output. 
Fig8.7.1.1 (a) Progress bar display 
5 When output of all text data is finished, the message” POWER MUST BE OFF. TURN ON THE 
POWER AGAIN TO SAVE SRAM AND USER FILE.” is displayed and NC data output signal 
ALLO is set to “0”.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
ALLO is set to “0”. 
 
6 Turn off the power then turn on the power again with external I/O device mounted. 
 When a display is PANELi, PC, or a display unit with Windows CE, operate either of the following 
operation. 
- Set "the display of the BOOT/IPL screen during the next startup of the CNC" before turning off 
the power. (For HSSB connection) 
- Set the rotary switch to "F" after turning off the power.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
B-64694EN/01 OPERATION 8. DATA INPUT/OUTPUT
- 1001 - 
- Turn on while still pressing MDI key 6 and 7 after turning off the power. (For a display unit 
with Windows CE) 
 Refer to "APPENDIX Option Setting Screen" in MAINTENACE MANUAL (B-64695EN) for "the 
display of the BOOT/IPL screen during the next startup of the CNC". 
 Refer to "APPENDIX CHANGING START SEQUENCES" in MAINTENACE MANUAL for the 
rotary switch on stand-alone type CNC.


key: chroma:document
string_value:
7 At power-up, SRAM data and user files are output. The progress report of output is displayed while 
outputting. 
File size (byte) 
(hexadecimal number) 
Finished size (byte) 
(hexadecimal number) File name 
Fig8.7.1.1 (b) Output of SRAM data and user files 
8 After finishing output of SRAM data and user files, CNC starts up. 
8.7.1.2 Format 
Memory card and USB memory can be formatted. 
When format is executed, all data in memory card or USB memory is cleared. 
NOTE


key: chroma:document
string_value:
NOTE 
 It is recommended to format memory card and USB memory before executing 
output operation of NC data output function. 
Format operation 
Procedure 
1 Display all data output screen. 
2 Press the soft key [(OPRT)]. 
3 Press the soft key [FORMAT]. 
 The message “FORMAT OK?” is displayed in message area. 
 To cancel the format, press the soft key [CAN]. 
4 Press the soft key [EXEC]. 
 The message “FORMAT EXECUTING” is displayed in message area.


